Micro Drainage Uk Manual

INDUSTRY STANDARD DRAINAGE DESIGN SOFTWARE
SYS1
SIM
SC
USER MANUAL
CASDeF
FloodFlow
DN
APT
Q OST
Qu
QuOST
MD
Micro Drainage
Revision 0 January 2014
Micro Drainage 2014
Examples - introduction
Page 0.1
Working with Micro Drainage

An example led
introduction to the
Micro Drainage suite.
Page 0.2
Contents
Introduction, Installation, Help
Example 1
System 1 - The Modified Rational Method
Example 2
System 1 - Open Channel Design
Example 3
System 1 - Schedules, Longsections, Plan & 3D Graphics
Example 4
System 1 - Foul Sewer Design with Schedules
Example 5
Source Control - Storage Lake
Example 6
Source Control - Tank Sewer
Example 7
Simulation - Simulation of a drainage system with tank sewers
Example 8
Simulation - Advanced Productivity Tools & CASDeF
Example 9
Channel - The Backwater Step Method
Example 10
Source Control - Infiltration Systems
Example 11
QuOST - Quantities & Costings
Example 12
DrawNet (CAD) - Working within AutoCAD
Example 13
DrawNet - Graphical Model Build
Example 14
FloodFlow - Overland Flow Path Analysis
Example 15
Pluvius Use of Extended Time Series Rainfall
Appendices
Appendix i
Appendix ii
Appendix iii
Appendix iv
Appendix v
Hydraulic Conduits
IDF, CRP and Hyetograph
Rural Discharge
Unit Hydrograph
Allowable discharge for Example 8
Page 0.3
Page 0.4
Introduction
These examples are designed to give you hands-on experience of working

with Micro Drainage. They have been created to demonstrate the key features
and benefits of the program by addressing most of the common problems
encountered in the analysis and design of drainage networks.
You should use them in conjunction with the program, referring to the results
on-screen where necessary. Images from the program have been used to
illustrate the main points of the procedure.
Installing Micro Drainage
With this pack you will have the Micro Drainage installation DVD and a
dongle.
To install Micro Drainage insert the DVD into the DVD-ROM drive. Do not
connect dongle until after the software is installed.
Note: Micro Drainage will not run without the dongle - always make sure it
is properly in place before trying to run Micro Drainage.
If you have Autoplay running, the installation procedure will launch
automatically and you will see the Micro Drainage Setup window.
Page 0.5
If autoplay is switched off or is not available then proceed as follows:
From the Start menu select the Run option.
At the Run window type the letter of your DVD-ROM drive followed
by :\setup (e.g. d:\setup).
Click OK.
At the Setup Window select Install Micro Drainage. The program will
display any relevant last minute instructions. When you are happy you are
ready to proceed click the Install Micro Drainage button.
Follow the on-screen prompts. When the Select Installation Folder window
appears, ensure the destination directory is correct.
Click Next to proceed through the Installation wizard.
Page 0.6
Upgrade copies
If you are upgrading an existing copy of Micro Drainage, follow the

installation procedure as if you were installing a new copy.
Installing a Network copy

Windows Server
A License Manager must be installed and running on the server before the
software can be installed to the client machines. This can be achieved by
selecting the License Manager option from the Autoplay menu, or by running
the LMSetup.exe program located in the \Hasp directory on the DVD.
The License Manager will require the red dongle to be connected to a free
USB port on the server.
If you wish to run Micro Drainage on the server then follow the same
procedure as above.
Windows Workstations
Follow the same procedure as for a standalone copy.
General Notes
Micro Drainage requires a device driver (haspdinst) to allow communication

with the dongle. This is installed automatically by the Setup program. Please
ensure this can be accomplished before you begin. The device driver is
loaded dynamically (no reboot is required), however this requires you to be
logged in as the Windows Administrator.
Page 0.7
Help
The DVD contains a host of other information relevant to installing and

getting started with Micro Drainage. See the Whats New / Help option for
the latest installation details or to see the major new features in Micro
Drainage 2014.
The topic entitled Read Me contains late breaking information. It is

recommended you read this before using the software.
The Help system can be accessed from any of the modules by either clicking
the Help button (found on most of the dialogue boxes), or by pressing the F1
key.
MDHelp provides you with valuable technical data and the detail behind the
operation of each module. It follows standard HTML (web page) protocols,
with blue text to help you switch between topics.
The Contents pane gives you a general overview of the topics covered by
Help. However, for a detailed listing of the topics, and to find help quickly on
a specific subject, we recommend that you use the Index or Search.
Page 0.8
Once you have found the section you want, use the browse buttons at the top
of the window to move forwards and backwards through the text.
Browse buttons
How Do I
Tutorials are also available for the most commonly asked questions. The
tutorials are contained in the last book in the Contents or can be accessed
directly from the Help menu in any of the modules.
The problems are listed in two sections, By Module and By Theme. To find
the help you require expand the trees.
XP Solutions reserves the right to change any part of the Micro Drainage suite of programs without
prior notice. XP Solutions 2014 XP Solutions recognises all trademarks.
Example 1
Page 1.1

Example 1 System 1
The Modified Rational Method
Page 1.2
Example 1
Introduction
This example takes you step-by-step through a typical network design, using
the Modified Rational Method as applied within the System 1 module of
Micro Drainage. It has been created to give you hands-on experience of
working with Micro Drainage.
Loading Network
Select the Start button and open the Micro Drainage 2014 menu from within
the Programs menu:
Click the module you wish to work with. For this example, select Network.
This will open all the network build modules held on your licence, and will
include System 1.
You will now see the Open dialogue box. Click Cancel and we will orientate
ourselves with the Micro Drainage package.
Select Module Selector from the Window menu and the screen overleaf
appears.
The Module Selector is the main selection menu of all the Micro Drainage
programs. It allows the user to change modules or add modules to the current
Example 1
Page 1.3
program. The modules in colour are those currently running. You can add or
remove a module by clicking on it.
System1, Simulation, DrawNet and QuOST are grouped under Network, but
can be run separately. APT, CASDeF and FloodFlow add additional
functionality to these modules. Source Control, Channel and Pluvius are
separate executables and can be launched from the Module Selector.
If you select a module that is not available on your licence you will be
offered the option to start the 30 Day Time Trial. This allows you to try-out
all modules that have not been purchased for 30 days.
The current active modules are listed in the bottom left-hand corner of the
screen. In the Module Selector select the System 1 module so its icon is
coloured; turn off all other modules by selecting them so they grey out.
Menus within the program will update to display all available options for
active modules.
Page 1.4
Example 1
The Edit menu presents you with options for the preparation and selection of
pipe, manhole, conduit and rainfall libraries which are also available where
required within each module. For these functions, see Appendix i and
Appendix ii, though you do not need them for this example.
The Options menu gives you the choice of industry standard formulae for the
hydraulic gradient and flow calculations. You can choose the combination
which best suits your requirements, but note that once you have started a
project you cannot go back and change your selection for that project.
Close the form by selecting the cross. You are now ready to start the first
example.
Example 1
Start a New Job
Page 1.5
Reopen the System 1 Open dialogue box by selecting Open from the File
menu. Choose the New Storm option by highlighting it and then clicking OK.
Design Criteria
You will now see the Design Criteria screen:
Page 1.6
Example 1
Rainfall Details
Begin by choosing the Rainfall Method. For this example we will accept FSR
Rainfall and England & Wales for the Region. In a real project you would
select the method and Region by clicking on the arrow to the right of the box.
See Appendix iii for more details on how to use an IDF Library.
Note: FEH Rainfall should not be used below 30 minutes duration. This
means that until further research is carried out by CEH Wallingford to
confirm its use for short durations, it cannot be used for a time of
concentration below 30 minutes.
In the case of hydrograph methods (Simulation and Source Control) if the
15 minute storm is critical then it should be checked using FSR unless
there is further advice from CEH Wallingford.
Proceed to enter the remaining Design Criteria as shown on page 1.5.
Note: All these values can be entered by clicking on the relevant box or
by using the keyboard arrows and then typing.
Pipe and Manhole Sizes
Micro Drainage allows you to specify your own pipe and manhole libraries
instead of the Standard libraries shown by default. Simply click on the button
next to the Pipes box and the Pipe Sizes form appears.
Example 1
Page 1.7
You may create your own library which can be saved for future use. Or you
can load any pipe library saved as a file with the extension .pipx. The same
approach is taken to change the manhole sizes.
Manhole size library files have the extension .mhsx. Size libraries can also be
created and edited from the Edit menu in the Module selector available from
the Window menu. Further information is given in the Help.
When you have finished entering the data, click OK to proceed.
Creating the network - Network Details
System 1 will now present you with the Network Details spreadsheet.
We will use this spreadsheet to design the following drainage network:

1.000
3.000
1.001
2.000
2.001
1.002
1.003
1.004
The known data for the network are as follows:
Page 1.8
Example 1
Pipe Pipe
Fall Slope Area Time Base Pipe
no
length [m] [1:x]
Entry Flow Rough
US/IL
[m]
US/CL
[m]
Pipe
DIA
1.000 100
1.000
100
1.001 50
2.000 20
0.25
3.000 35.5
2.001 21.6
0.25
100
10
0.6
0.5
0.01
100
125
0.02
100
1.002 25
1.52
356
1.003 78.9
490
5.7
1.004 100
500
1500
Note: Here, R denotes Return. Where no entry is shown, System 1 will

automatically skip the column. This procedure applies within all
subsequent examples. Note also that where a pipeline is entered in
sequence, you can hit Return instead of entering the next pipe number.
Thus for pipe 1.001 you could use the Return key; however, pipe 2.000
breaks the sequence and must be entered manually.
We will now proceed to enter each line in turn.
Completing the spreadsheet
Note that the first box of the spreadsheet is automatically highlighted. Enter
the data for pipe 1.000 by typing the numbers and pressing Return.
Pipe Pipe
US/IL
no
length [m] [1:x]
Entry Flow Rough [m]
US/CL
[m]
Pipe
DIA
1.000 100
1.000
0.25
10
0.6
100
Note that Slope calculates automatically and that Pipe Diameter calculates
when you hit Return for the last time. System 1 will always automatically
select the smallest available section from the pipe library you have chosen in this case, the Standard pipe library. In a live project, do not enter a value
for Pipe Diameter unless you are sure it is appropriate to do so - for instance
if you are working with an existing network.
Example 1
Page 1.9
Upstream Invert Levels, Area and Time of Entry are shown in red, because
they are values which you have specified and are not calculated by System 1.
Immediate feedback
Note how the results of your entries are automatically calculated in the lower
row. This means that you can see immediately whether or not the values you
have used are achieving the desired effect.
Correcting errors
If you are not satisfied with the data in the upper half of your spreadsheet,
you can correct any errors simply by highlighting the box concerned. This
can be done either with the mouse (by pointing and clicking) or using the
keyboard arrows. When the box is highlighted simply key in the correct
values.
Note: If you do not specify a pipe number or length, System 1
automatically warns you to do so before allowing you to move on.
Pipe 1.001
First, experiment with the error facility by entering 1.002 for Pipe Number.
System 1 warns you that it is an Invalid Pipe Number. Enter the correct
value, followed by the remainder of this sequence:
Pipe Pipe
US/IL US/CL
no
length [m] [1:x]
[m]
Pipe
DIA
1.001 50
100
0.5
Notice how Fall automatically calculates when you key in the value for
Slope.
After you have entered Area, System 1 automatically takes you to US/CL
(upstream cover levels), since the program automatically calculates the
values in between. We will be entering cover levels later, so here simply hit
Return to move to Pipe Diameter. Hitting Return here (or entering 0)
automatically calculates the value and moves you to the next row of the
spreadsheet.
You can alter the automatic calculations if you need to, using the keyboard or
Page 1.10
Example 1
mouse as described previously. However, Time of Entry cannot, of course, be

changed as this is only required at the head of a branch line.
Equally, you should not specify an upstream invert level (US/IL) unless you
wish to specify a backdrop. System 1 automatically places the pipes soffit-tosoffit or invert-to-invert, in accordance with the options chosen in the Design
Criteria. Accordingly, the automatically calculated invert level is shown in
blue, whereas an invert level which you specified would show as red.
Pipes 2.000 and 3.000
Now enter the following two rows:

Pipe Pipe
US/IL US/CL
no
length [m] [1:x]
[m]
Pipe
DIA
2.000 20
0.25
3.000 35.5
125
0.01
100
0.02
100
As both these pipes are at the head of a branch line, the Time of Entry is
automatically entered, using your original specified time (5) as a default.
Similarly, Pipe Roughness defaults to 0.6; if you alter this value, the new
value will then be used as the new default by the program.
In this instance, pipes 2.000 and 3.000 have a velocity which is below the
recognised minimum of 1m/s as specified by Sewers for Adoption.
Accordingly, they are shown in green.
Note: Some specifications are less stringent and require 0.7m/s (EN 752).
0.75m/s has been the traditional minimum (formerly 2 ft/s CP2005 1969)
used for several decades and can be acceptable to approving authorities
where pumping can be avoided by its adoption.
Pipe 2.001
Now enter this row:

Pipe Pipe
US/IL
no
length [m] [1:x]
US/CL
[m]
Pipe
DIA
Example 1
2.001 21.6
Page 1.11
R
Note that Fall, Slope and Diameter are not specified here. This is the only
time that the program uses the minimum velocity specified in the Design
Criteria. This is what is meant by Auto-Design in the Design Criteria screen.
A diameter and slope (or fall) will be chosen by System 1, which will yield a
velocity within the specified range. However, note that if a slope or fall is
chosen, then the program chooses the smallest diameter, regardless of
velocity. Conversely, if a diameter is chosen and not a slope/fall, then the
program calculates the minimum slope required to take the flow - again,
regardless of velocity.
In addition, note that the slope of 2.000 is automatically altered to bring its
downstream end level with 3.000, removing a small backdrop. The note at
the bottom of the screen tells you that this has been done.
Pipe 1.002
Enter the following row:

Pipe Pipe
US/IL
no
length [m] [1:x]
US/CL
[m]
Pipe
DIA
1.002 25
356
1.52
Here, you specify the diameter and the 356 appears in red. The slope is given
to closely match the flow. As you can see, you can specify non-standard
diameters as well as standard diameters.
Pipe 1.003

Pipe Pipe
US/IL
no
length [m] [1:x]
1.003 78.9
490
5.7
US/CL
[m]
R
Pipe
DIA
2
This time you are specifying both the Diameter and the Slope. It is no
mistake that the diameter is 2. When you specify a diameter, which is less
than 66 you are in fact specifying a hydraulic section, which is held in an
internal library of the most commonly used non-circular sections.
Page 1.12
Example 1
The properties of these sections, which include box culverts, open channels,
double and triple pipelines and egg shaped sewers, can be viewed by clicking
the Conduits button when you are in the Diameter column of the spreadsheet.
In a real project you can also create or load a conduit library of your own.
Appendix ii has full details of this facility.
Pipe 1.004

Pipe Pipe
US/IL
no
length [m] [1:x]
US/CL
[m]
Pipe
DIA
1.004 100
1500
500
Here we specify both Slope and Diameter, as you would if the pipe already
existed. The 1500mm pipe has spare capacity and the program accepts it. If
the pipe was under capacity, System 1 would overrule you and increase the
diameter. A way to avoid this automatic upgrading when you are working
with an existing system that may be overloaded is explained in a later
example.
Checking your entry
Your Network Details spreadsheet should now look like the following
example:
Example 1
Page 1.13
Saving your work and opening new projects
Before we examine how to edit data in a completed project, we will save and
re-open this finished version. To do so, select Save from the File menu.
You will then be presented with the Save Network File window:
In the File name box enter the title Example1 and click Save, or press Return.
Note: System 1 is not case-sensitive when searching for file names, so the
use of capitals is not essential when opening or re-opening files.
To confirm that your file has been saved, exit from System 1 by selecting
Exit from the File menu.
Now follow the procedure for opening System 1 via the Start button we used
at the beginning of this example.
When the Open screen appears, the option to continue with Example1.mdx
will be displayed. Click on its icon to highlight it and select OK, and you are
returned to the Network Details screen.
You can open and save files quickly using the toolbar icons:
Saves your file
Opens a file
Editing
Page 1.14
Example 1
Editing an existing line
Go to pipe 1.001, either by using the scroll bar and clicking on that line or by
using the keyboard arrows. Enter a value of 125 for Slope - don't forget to hit
Return. System 1 automatically re-calculates the values for pipe 1.001 and all
pipes downstream.
Note: If you now try to alter the value for Slope again, you will find that
the cursor automatically highlights Fall and not Slope. To re-calculate
Slope, enter a 0 for Fall and the original value of 100 for Slope. Once again
System 1 re-calculates and a value of 0.500 is restored for Fall.
Deleting a pipe
Highlight pipe 1.001. To delete this pipe, click on the Delete Pipe icon in the
toolbar.
Deletes a pipe
The Delete Pipe dialogue box now appears.
The number of the pipe highlighted is automatically shown. However, you

can select another pipe number if you prefer. To delete the pipe, simply click
OK or press Return.
Note: When you delete pipe 1.001, System 1 automatically re-numbers the
remaining pipes, e.g. pipe 1.002 is now pipe 1.001, pipe 1.003 is now pipe
1.002 etc.
Example 1
Page 1.15
Inserting a pipe
To insert a pipe, highlight a pipe following the point at which you wish to
insert a new pipe. For this example, click on pipe 1.001. Then choose the
Insert Pipe icon.
Inserts a pipe
The Insert Pipe dialogue box now appears. We have two choices. Upstream
of is to insert a pipe which flows into the selected pipe, as would be
required here. Downstream of is to insert a pipe which receives flow from
the selected pipe.
You can accept the number of the specified pipe, or select a different pipe
from the network. However, for this example click Cancel, because we will
shortly restore pipe 1.001 using a different function.
If you had clicked OK, System 1 would have inserted a blank row above pipe
1.001 and would again automatically re-number the rest of the spreadsheet.
Re-inserting the deleted pipe Revision Manager
Selecting Previous Revision from the File menu re-inserts the pipe you
deleted. This uses the Revision Manager function which stores a history of
data states and edit actions in a database which can be viewed by selecting
Revision Manager from the File menu.
Page 1.16
Example 1
The Revision Manager will be operating if Save Undo Information is

checked on under the Settings tab. The History tab shows all saved revisions
which can be restored by selecting a Revision and clicking Undo.
Longitudinal section
The Longsections function gives you a full graphic representation of the

network. To display a longitudinal section, click the Longsections icon.
Longsections
The screen presents you with a Longitudinal section at the point within the
network corresponding to the location of the cursor on the spreadsheet. The
default settings only show 1 pipe.
Previous pipes displayed
Above the Longsection itself is a command enabling you to alter the number
of pipes displayed on the screen at one time.
To increase the number of pipes, click the up arrow. To reduce the number of
pipes, click the down arrow. Alternatively type in the box the number of
pipes you wish to view and the Longsection will automatically update.
You can experiment with this facility by moving the box to the right-hand
side of the scroll bar. In our example, there are five different pipes in the
Example 1
Page 1.17
main line; System 1 allows you to view up to thirty pipes at a time.

Click the up or down arrow until the command reads 5 or simply type 5 in the
box. You will now see all pipes of the main line displayed in longsection.
Now click the down arrow, so that the command reads 4.
System 1 removes pipe 1.000 and zooms you in closer to the remaining pipes
displayed. Change the number of pipes displayed back to 5.
Note: If you had clicked the up arrow, the screen would have remained
unchanged, since there are only five pipes in this line.
There are several icons above the Longsection which we can use to adjust the
display. Click the icon below to view the cross-section of each pipe showing
the proportional depth and proportional velocity of the flow.
Show Cross-section
You can move along the network using the box in the scroll bar beneath the
display. Move the box to the right-hand end of the bar to see a full display.
Page 1.18
Example 1
Note: The blue circle for pipe 2.001 is shown above the pipeline profile, to
indicate that a backdrop has been incorporated at the junction of the two
lines. This is because the invert level for pipe 2.001 (99.716) lies outside
the minimum backdrop height of 0.200m specified in Design Criteria. Had
it fallen within the specified minimum, System 1 would have automatically
recalculated to eliminate the requirement for a backdrop.
Branches can be turned on by depressing the Include branch lines option:
Include branch lines
Branch lines are shown in Blue, to change colours on screen or for printing
see Example 3. To view a branch, move the box so that the junction of the
branch with the main line is the last section to be displayed on the screen. In
this example, move the box approximately to the centre of the scroll bar.
You will now see pipes 2.000 and 2.001, with a blue circle indicating the
branch with pipe 3.000 and a pink circle showing where pipe 2.001 joins the
main network.
Example 1
Page 1.19
Pause?
You have now completed the first stage of Example 1. This is an appropriate
place to take a break if you need one.
Managing windows in System 1
A key benefit of Micro Drainage is the facility to move between the elements
of each module quickly and easily. Using our example, we will now practice
sizing windows and arranging them on the System 1 desktop.
Sizing windows
Use the Windows re-sizing button to shrink the Longsections screen without
sending it to the Task Bar.
You should now see a scaled down version of Longsections with the Network
Details spreadsheet behind it:
Page 1.20
Example 1
Switching between windows
For this example, you are going to delete a pipe to demonstrate how System 1
automatically re-calculates between functions - and how easy it is to switch
between the functions to see the results.
First, click on the Design Criteria icon:
Design Criteria
Design Criteria appears in front of the existing screens. Then choose Cascade
from the Window menu and all three Windows are arranged tidily on the
screen.
Select the Network Details window by clicking in its title bar. You can work
with the data within the spreadsheet even though the window does not fill the
screen. To make all the title bars visible again, choose Cascade from the
Window menu.
Before proceeding, make sure you have saved all your work so far. Then
delete pipe 1.003, following the procedure set out in Deleting a pipe on page
1.14. Then click on the Longsections title bar and expand the screen by
clicking the middle re-sizing button.
Adjust the scroll bar until the complete network is shown (by sliding the box
to the right-hand side of the scroll) and ensure that the command box at the
top of the screen shows 5 Pipes.
You will see that in fact only four pipes are displayed, since the original pipe
1.003 has been removed. Pipe 1.004 is the new pipe 1.003, as specified on
the Network Details spreadsheet. Finally, choose Cascade again to make all
three functions of System 1 visible.
Note: A quick way to switch between windows using the keyboard is to
hold down Ctrl and use the Tab button to toggle between the windows.
Before moving on, reinstate pipe 1.003 by selecting Previous Revision from
the File menu.
Example 1
Page 1.21
Note: If you are familiar with the clicking and dragging capabilities of
Windows, you may find it easier simply to click in the title bars of the
functions and drag them around the desktop, instead of using the Cascade
facility.
Auto-refresh
If Longsections was visible when you altered the pipeline details, you may
have noticed that the graphic of the network was automatically changed at the
same time. System 1 automatically refreshes Longsections whenever a
change is made to the spreadsheet. This is a particularly useful function,
allowing you to see each pipe in Longsection as it is added to the network.
Optimise
We will now demonstrate the Optimise function, beginning by entering the

cover levels for the network we have already designed.
Entry of cover levels
Enter the following data for each pipe in the US/CL[m] column. Simply type
in the numbers and press the down arrow.
Pipe number
1.000
1.001
2.000
3.000
2.001
1.002
1.003
1.004
US/CL [m]
103
100.5
102
102.5
100.8
100.7
99.2
98
System 1 warns you (in the Warning bar at the foot of the screen) that the
data is inconsistent with the depth of 1.2m designated in the Design Criteria.
To see the effect this has, look at Longsections. It may help if you turn on the
Show pipe bounds which displays the Design Depth.
Show pipe bounds
Page 1.22
Example 1
The effect is particularly marked at the conjunction of pipes 2.001 and 1.002.
Note the hydraulic grade line (HGL) which is shown in blue.
Next, return to Network Details and go to the Pipe DIA [mm] column. Delete
each of the entries shown in red - i.e. all those figures, which you specified,
rather than allowing System 1 to calculate them automatically - by entering
zero.
Hit Return as you delete each figure and System 1 automatically calculates
the new pipe diameters. Then simply click Optimise.
Optimise
The Optimise dialogue box now appears:
Example 1
Page 1.23
You have, of course, already asked System 1 to re-calculate your pipe

diameters. Click Yes or press Y.
System 1 re-calculates to produce the optimum design depth at 1.2m
throughout the entire network. To see the effect, go to Longsection again.
Note that 1.004 does not have its ground profile because the downstream
cover level is not known at this stage. In addition, you will see that design
depth has been set at 1.2m wherever possible. System 1 uses design depth,
measured from the connection height to cover level. This can be further
observed in the Network Details by looking at the Warnings/Notes box at the
bottom of the screen.
Obstructions underground - how to avoid them
In the event that your optimised network encounters an obstruction

somewhere along its length, such as an electrical cable or gas pipeline,
System 1 allows you to input a different invert level and pipe diameter for the
affected point.
In this case, let us assume that pipe 1.001 cannot be placed at the level
automatically calculated by System 1. Replace the upstream invert level with
a value of 98, to allow the pipe to be laid below the service crossing, and the
pipe diameter with a value of 450. When the pipe diameter is entered (and
Return) both the level and diameter should be in red as they are user
specified. Optimise will now leave this pipe in place (unless it is too high or
has insufficient capacity).
Go to Longsections and note that the network once again fails to follow the
ground profile at the optimum depth. If you display the pipes downstream
you will see that these pipes have also had their depths increased.
Return to Network Details and click Optimise, again choosing Yes at the
dialogue box. A return to Longsections shows how System 1 optimises the
network throughout its entire length, including the pipes downstream of the
fixed pipe which are once more at their minimum design depth.
This demonstrates System 1's capacity to optimise an entire system around
any number of fixed pipes within the network.
Page 1.24
Example 1
Note: As well as fixing pipes in space it is also possible to specify a

different required design depth on a pipe by pipe basis. In this instance pipe
1.001 would require a deeper design depth to drop it below the obstruction.
An extra column can be switched on in the spreadsheet from Preferences
available from the Network Details toolbar to allow this.
Automatic Optimisation
Finally, let us now use the automatic optimisation facility built-in to System
1 to enter two more pipes.
Click the Optimise On icon in the toolbar:
Optimise On
Now key in the following pipe details:
Pipe Pipe
US/IL
no
length [m] [1:x]
US/CL
[m]
Pipe
DIA
1.005 50
0.25
96.000
1.006 50
250
0.25
95.500
Choose Longsection again and note how System 1 has automatically

specified the new pipes to follow the ground profile.
Designing to a Required Outfall
Many new designs require you to connect into a fixed level, whether it is an
existing sewer or watercourse. Hitting this required level has always been the
bane of the design engineer and designing from the outfall upwards goes
against the forward flow design path of the Modified Rational Method. To
reverse design is an onerous task to carry out by hand.
System 1 allows you to specify the required outfall level in the Outfall
Details and Optimise will redesign the system to meet this level.
The design we have completed has an outfall level of 93.2m. However the
outfall level we require is 94m so we have missed it by 800mm.
Example 1
Page 1.25
Open the Outfall Details by selecting it from the Network menu.
Enter 94 in the Min IL (m) box and then click OK.

Before we do the Full Optimise to meet our required outfall we need to turn
the Automatic Optimise function off. Click the icon in the toolbar to turn it
off.
Optimise Off
Now click the Full Optimise button and say Yes to the first warning message.
A second warning message will appear asking if you would like to raise the
outfall invert as it is lower than 94m.
Click Yes to this message and Optimise will redesign the system.
Page 1.26
Example 1
The Network Details show that the Downstream Invert Level for 1.006 has
been raised to meet our required outfall invert of 94m.
Note: As the message suggests a minimum invert level can be specified at

any point in the system. An extra column can be switched on in the
spreadsheet from Preferences to allow this.
In reaching our minimum outfall System 1 has had to break the minimum
cover rule of 1.2m in some places. Look at the Longsections to see the effect
of this. You will need to increase the number of pipes displayed to 7 to see
the entire network.
Example 1
Page 1.27
Network Schematic
This facility allows you to view a graphic model of the network. Click on the
Schematic icon:
Schematic
The schematic is presented showing whichever pipe is highlighted on the
pipeline details at the centre of the system. The pipe is shown in red. The
number of pipes to display will need to be increased to 6.
The rest of the pipes in any given line are shown in yellow, while branches
are shown in blue. Click on any pipe with the right mouse button and select
Properties and the properties of the pipe are shown in a popup window. For
more information on Properties see Example 13.
You can also move through the system by clicking on branches. Try clicking
on branch 2; pipes 2.000 and 2.001 are shown, with an arrow to depict the
conjunction with the main line:
Page 1.28
Example 1
Printing within System 1
System 1 gives you the option to print a variety of hard copies, based on the
values calculated. All the print commands are located under the File menu.
A quicker way to open the dialogue box is to click the Print icon in the
toolbar:
Print
When you select Print, System 1 shows you the Print dialogue box:
These options are self-explanatory; you choose the options you would like to
print simply by clicking in the appropriate box. Click the Update Preview
button to see a print preview. When you are satisfied with the selected
options click the printer icon at the top of the dialogue to send the job to the
printer.
Page Setup allows you to edit the margins. The printer can be chosen when
you click the print icon in the Print window.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 04/12/2013
File Example1.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 29
Example 1
System 1
Designed by XP Solutions
Checked by
Network 2013.1.5
STORM SEWER DESIGN by the Modified Rational Method
Design Criteria for Storm
Pipe Sizes STANDARD Manhole Sizes STANDARD
FSR Rainfall Model - England and Wales

Return Period (years)
1
Add Flow / Climate Change (%)
20
M5-60 (mm) 20.000
Minimum Backdrop Height (m) 0.200
Ratio R 0.400
Maximum Backdrop Height (m) 1.500
Maximum Rainfall (mm/hr)
50 Min Design Depth for Optimisation (m) 1.200
Maximum Time of Concentration (mins)
30
Min Vel for Auto Design only (m/s) 1.00
Foul Sewage (l/s/ha) 1.000
Min Slope for Optimisation (1:X)
500
Volumetric Runoff Coeff. 0.750
Designed with Level Soffits
Time Area Diagram for Storm

Time
Area
(mins) (ha)
Time
(mins)
0-4 4.200
Area
(ha)
4-8 4.263
Time
(mins)
Area
(ha)
8-12 0.037
Total Area Contributing (ha) = 8.500

Total Pipe Volume (m) = 183.571
Network Design Table for Storm

PN
Length
(m)
Fall Slope I.Area T.E.

Base
k
HYD DIA
(m) (1:X) (ha) (mins) Flow (l/s) (mm) SECT (mm)
1.000 100.000 2.500 40.0

1.001 50.000 0.125 400.0
0.250
0.500
5.00
0.00
10.0 0.600
0.0 0.600
o
o
225
450
2.000
20.000 1.200
16.7
0.010
5.00
0.0 0.600
100
3.000
35.500 1.700
20.9
0.020
5.00
0.0 0.600
100
2.001
21.600 0.369
58.6
0.000
0.00
0.0 0.600
100
1.002
1.003
25.000 0.325
78.900 1.200
76.9
65.8
1.520
5.700
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.600
0.0 0.600
o
o
525
750
Network Results Table

PN
Rain
T.C.
(mm/hr) (mins)
US/IL
(m)
I.Area
Base
Foul Add Flow Vel
Cap
(ha)
Flow (l/s) (l/s)
(l/s)
(m/s) (l/s)
Flow
(l/s)
1.000
1.001
50.00
48.01
5.80 101.575
6.63 98.000
0.250
0.750
10.0
10.0
0.3
0.8
8.8
21.7
2.07
1.01
82.5
160.7
52.9
129.9
2.000
50.00
5.18 100.700
0.010
0.0
0.0
0.3
1.90
14.9
1.6
3.000
50.00
5.35 101.200
0.020
0.0
0.0
0.5
1.70
13.3
3.3
2.001
50.00
5.71
99.500
0.030
0.0
0.0
0.8
1.01
7.9
4.9
1.002
1.003
47.44
46.17
6.79
7.17
97.800
97.250
2.300
8.000
10.0
10.0
2.3
8.0
61.6
203.7
1982-2013 XP Solutions
2.56 553.3 369.4

3.45 1526.2 1222.0
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 04/12/2013
File Example1.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 30
Example 1
System 1
Checked by
Network 2013.1.5
PN
Length
(m)

Base
k
HYD DIA
1.004 100.000 1.550 64.5

1.005 50.000 0.100 500.0
1.006 50.000 0.100 500.0
0.000
0.250
0.250
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.600
0.0 0.600
0.0 0.600
o 750
o 1050
o 1050

PN
1.004
1.005
1.006
Rain
T.C.
US/IL I.Area
Base
Foul Add Flow Vel
Cap
(mm/hr) (mins)
(m)
(ha)
Flow (l/s) (l/s)
(l/s)
(m/s) (l/s)
44.68
43.11
41.67
7.65 96.050
8.19 94.200
8.74 94.100
8.000
8.250
8.500
10.0
10.0
10.0
8.0
8.3
8.5
203.7
203.7
203.7
3.49 1540.7 1222.0

1.53 1328.5 1222.0
1.53 1328.5 1222.0
Free Flowing Outfall Details for Storm

D,L
W
Outfall
Outfall C. Level I. Level
Min
Pipe Number
Name
(m)
(m)
I. Level (mm) (mm)
(m)
1.006
0.000
94.000
94.000
Flow
(l/s)
Example 2
Page 2.1

Example 2 - System 1
Open Channel Design
Page 2.2
Example 2
Introduction
Pipe networks and open channels share many characteristics and it is

therefore appropriate to use System 1 for the design of an open channel
system.
In this example we will examine how a specific conduit library can be
created and analysed, using Micro Drainages integral conduit design facility.
We will also see how a network combining open channels and pipes can be
created.
The intention here is to keep all water levels below 600mm. However, in
order to allow the Simulation module to show overloading when it occurs, we
shall define the section to a depth of 1 metre.
Setting up the network
We need only a few sections to demonstrate the principles involved. The

following network will be sufficient:
Example 2
Page 2.3
Begin by opening System 1 and select New Storm. Enter the Design Criteria
as follows:
Note that we have given the system 15% spare capacity by allowing for 15%
additional flow.
Preference
Click OK to call up the Network Details spreadsheet. However, before

proceeding to enter any data, we need to add some additional columns to the
spreadsheet.
This is done by selecting Preferences from the tool bar.
Preferences
The Preferences dialogue box presents you with a variety of options, which
help you tailor the Network Details spreadsheet to suit your requirements.
Page 2.4
Example 2
You can, for example, switch off any columns you are not interested in. Here,
however, note that Pipe Roughness and Manning's n (n) are not ticked. Click
on n and Pipe Roughness to tick them as shown below. On the Results tab
ensure the Proportional Velocity (Pro. Vel m/s) and Proportional Depth (Pro.
Depth mm) fields are selected as shown below. Then click OK.
Data entry
For the first line of the spreadsheet, enter the following. Note that since pipe
1.000 is the first pipe in the line, you could use the automatic pipe numbering
facility and simply press Return instead of entering the number manually:
Pipe Pipe
no
length [m] [1:x]
Entry Flow Rough
US/IL
[m]
US/CL
[m]
1.000 100
0.012
100
0.5
0.25
10
Pipe
DIA
COND
BUTTON
The command COND BUTTON here means that you should click the
Conduits button when the Pipe Diameter field is highlighted.
Conduits
Example 2
Page 2.5
This enables you to load or create your preferred conduit library, from which
you can select the required sections.
Setting up the Library

We are going to specify two different types of conduit, a built in culvert
section and a pipe for this system. This will include designing our own
section (see Appendix ii for more on this).
The Conduit Picker form defaults to the System tab which contains all 65
default conduits supplied with the software. Select the User tab; in this part of
the form you can create your own bespoke conduits. Select the Edit button
and the Conduit Designer form is loaded.
Choose the Free option and enter the following data for the first section.
Click on the Channel button and Micro Drainage automatically calculates the
areas and wetted perimeter values.
Page 2.6
Example 2
This gives us a standard trapezoidal section. However, note the connection

height: 600mm. Although our specified height is 1 metre, to allow for a
proper simulation of extreme conditions within Simulation, where pipes are
to be connected to the system we need to ensure that the flow does not come
in above our prescribed level for normal flows.
Note: The Open Section box is ticked to indicate we have created an open
section.
The next section is one you can create yourself. Highlight the next row on the
spreadsheet and choose the Create option. Then select Define.
Enter the following data for the section:
Click OK and the section data are entered onto the spreadsheet. You can use
the forward slash and backward slash keys to create the Free symbol in the
Symbol column. Note, however that the connection height (measured
between the pipes invert and the soffit of the upstream pipe) defaults to the
height of the section. You will need to alter this from 1 metre to 600mm.
Next, we require a U-shaped section. Enter a width of 500mm, a height of
1000mm and a connection height of 600mm. Then choose Free again and
click the U Shape button to calculate the variables for the section.
Example 2
Page 2.7
We now have sufficient sections for our demonstration. They will be saved as
part of the .mdx file the next time you save. Alternatively, the sections can be
saved as Example2.secx and opened for other projects. Select OK for the
Conduit Designer form and return to the Conduit Picker form.
Specifying a section
Specify the first section simply by highlighting it and clicking OK. Note that
the section is shown by the value -1. This indicates that it is a conduit taken
from your own library, rather than the default. See Appendix ii for more
details.
For pipe 1.001 enter the following:
Pipe Pipe
no
length [m] [1:x]
Entry Flow Rough
1.001 50
0.3
US/IL
[m]
0.25
US/CL
[m]
Pipe
DIA
Hitting Return instructs System 1 to repeat the last value for Pipe diameter;
thus section -1 is chosen again.
Adding a branch
We now wish to specify a pipe branch line discharging into the channel. The
data are:
Pipe Pipe
no
length [m] [1:x]
Entry Flow Rough
2.000 20
50
0.5
0.6
US/IL
[m]
US/CL
[m]
Pipe
DIA
100
This time, hitting Return gives us a pipe diameter value of 300mm.

For the third section in the channel we want to put in a culvert, we can use
one of the predefined culverts in the software. We need to add more fields to
the spreadsheet to select one.
Page 2.8
Example 2
Select Preferences button on the Network Details tool bar and click on the
Input tab. Check the boxes for Section Type, Connection Height (C.Height)
and Conduit Symbol and then click OK.
Enter the pipe details as shown below:
Pipe Pipe Fall Slope Area Time Base Pipe n US/IL Section Type C. Height US/CL Conduit Pipe
No. length [m] [1:x]
Entry Flow Rough
[m]
[m]
[m]
Symbol DIA
1.002 100
0.5
600 Culvert
We will specify neither Fall nor Slope. In the Section Type field, click on the
dropdown menu and select the 600 Culvert, this refers to the height of the
culvert in mm. The software chooses the smallest width culvert that can take
the flow (900mm) and displays it in the Pipe DIA column. The Help on
culverts and other section types can be found by pressing the F1 key.
Note: The cursor is automatically moved into the US/CL column when you
press Enter in the Area column since this is not the head of a branchline.
Step back to the Section Type column and select the required section from
the drop down menu.
System 1 calculates the minimum slope required for the culvert to
accommodate the flow. However, the branch - pipe 2.000 - is now defined
with a connection height of 700mm. This gives us a backdrop of 100mm,
since we specified a connection height for the conduit sections of 600mm.
The backdrop falls within the minimum backdrop height of 200mm specified
in Design Criteria. System 1 therefore corrects the slope for pipe 2.000 from
50 to 40. The warning bar at the foot of the spreadsheet notifies you of the
change. Switch to Longsections to see the effect of this:
Example 2
Page 2.9
The dotted line indicates the connection height specified (600mm), whereas
the solid yellow line depicts the top of the channel at a height of 1 metre. The
culvert 1.002 therefore connects at the level of the dotted line, as does the
incoming branch 2.000. Note also that the hydraulic grade line (the
approximate water level) is below the 600mm connection height.
Calculating flow capacity
Finally, input the data for pipe 1.003:

Pipe Pipe Fall Slope Area Time Base Pipe
n US/IL Section Type C. Height US/CL Conduit Pipe
No. length [m] [1:x]
Entry Flow Rough
[m]
[m]
[m]
Symbol DIA
1.003 100
0.5
0.012
600 Culvert
Note: As with pipe 2.000 you will need to use the cursor keys to step back
to the Mannings n column. You will now be able to enter the required
Manning's n.
With a substantially increased area, the flow is too great for a culvert of the
same size. System 1 therefore increases the width of the culvert to 1200mm.
Page 2.10
Example 2
For this example we will make the final section open. To find a suitable
section from our own conduit file, highlight the pipe diameter field again and
click the Conduits button.
With a flow/capacity ratio of 1.031, which is 3 per cent greater than the
capacity of section -3, the section is greyed out since it cannot accommodate
the flow. You are left with the choice of the remaining two sections.
Section -1 has a ratio suggesting it will probably flow deeper than our
prescribed maximum of 600mm. Therefore click on section -2, with its
flow/capacity ratio of 0.317, and then click OK.
Section -2 is accepted, accommodating the flow of 1021.9 l/s at a depth of
564mm.
Note: Even though section -2 appears in its place on the spreadsheet, the
calculations to give the values above will not be made until you have hit
Return or moved the cursor off the row.
Simulation
While System 1 provides a snapshot of the flows through the system, and
ensures the optimum specification for the return period, it does not provide
true backwater analysis. For real-time representation of the hydraulic grade
lines, this type of system should be analysed within the Simulation module.
When you have completed Example 3 (Schedules) and Example 7
(Simulation) of this manual, or if you are already familiar with the
Simulation module, you can proceed to generate true hydraulic grade lines
for this system using the following steps.
Enter cover levels
Enter a cover level of 102m for all sections and pipes within the network.
Then save the file as Example2.mdx.
Example 2
Page 2.11
Schedules
Open the Network menu, select Outfall Details and enter the values as
follows:
Click OK. System 1 automatically schedules the network. To view the

Schedules, from the Network Details form click on the Schedules button.
Schedules
Note: Between open sections there are no manholes. If required a manhole

can be added by changing the US Connection type from Junction to Open
Manhole and by entering a diameter into the US/MH Diam/Len column.
Save the file.
Page 2.12
Example 2
Module Selector
Select Module Selector from the Window menu. Click on the Simulation icon
to add the module. Menus within the program will update to display all
available options for the Simulation module.
Running Simulation
Click OK at the Simulation Criteria and set the program to analyse At Fine
time step from the Analyse menu.
Real Time Backwater Analysis
Call up the Longsections. The red line is an envelope of maximum water

levels. Now animate the moving water levels as the storm passes through the
system. The envelope of maximum water levels may be printed through the
Plot module and it is a far more detailed analysis than the static levels
available through the Modified Rational Method.
The network may also be tested for 10, 20, 30 etc. year storms to observe it
overloading and flooding. Example 7 is recommended for those who wish to
master Simulation.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 05/12/2013
File Example2.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 13
Example 2
System 1
Open channel Design
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Design Criteria for Storm

5
15
M5-60 (mm) 20.000
Ratio R 0.400
30
500
Time Area Diagram for Storm

Time
Area
(mins) (ha)
Time
(mins)
0-4 3.116
Area
(ha)
4-8 1.373
Time
(mins)
Area
(ha)
8-12 0.011
Total Area Contributing (ha) = 4.500

Total Pipe Volume (m) = 244.509

PN
Length
(m)

Base
k
(m) (1:X) (ha) (mins) Flow (l/s) (mm)
S1.000 100.000 0.500 200.0

S1.001 50.000 0.300 166.7
0.250
0.250
5.00
0.00
S2.000
40.0
0.500
5.00
0.0 0.600
S1.002 100.000 0.136 735.3

S1.003 100.000 0.500 200.0
0.500
3.000
0.00
0.00
20.000 0.500
10.0
0.0
HYD
SECT
0.012
0.012
DIA
(mm)
\/
\/
-1
-1
300
0.0 0.600
600 []
0.0
0.012
\/
900
-2

PN
Rain
T.C.
(mm/hr) (mins)
US/IL
(m)
I.Area
Base
Foul Add Flow Vel
Cap
(ha)
Flow (l/s) (l/s)
(l/s)
(m/s) (l/s)
Flow
(l/s)
S1.000
S1.001
85.88
83.80
5.70 100.000
6.02 99.500
0.250
0.500
10.0
10.0
0.0
0.0
10.2
18.5
2.39 1466.8
2.62 1606.8
78.4
142.0
S2.000
89.86
5.13 100.000
0.500
0.0
0.0
18.3
2.49
139.9
S1.002
S1.003
74.62
72.10
7.68
8.22
1.500
4.500
10.0
10.0
0.0
0.0
47.0
133.3
99.200
99.064
176.2
1.00 462.0 360.1

3.07 3228.7 1022.1
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 05/12/2013
File Example2.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 14
Example 2
System 1
Open channel Design
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Conduit Sections for Storm
NOTE: Diameters less than 66 refer to section numbers of hydraulic
conduits. These conduits are marked by the symbols:- [] box
culvert, \/ open channel, oo dual pipe, ooo triple pipe, O egg.
Section numbers < 0 are taken from user conduit table
Section Conduit Major Minor Side Corner 4*Hyd XSect
Number
Type
Dimn. Dimn. Slope Splay Radius Area
(m)
(m)
(mm) (mm) (Deg) (mm)
-1
-2
\/
\/
250
1700
1000
1000
70.0
1.033 0.614
1.508 1.050
Free Flowing Outfall Details for Storm

D,L
W
Outfall
Min
Pipe Number
Name
(m)
(m)
I. Level (mm) (mm)
(m)
S1.003
101.000
98.564
98.000 1800
Example 3
Page 3.1

Example 3 System1
Schedules, Longsections,
Plan & 3D Graphics
Page 3.2
Example 3
Introduction
In this example we are going to use the Micro Drainage Schedules module to
input manhole data in detail. The data for this example is contained in the file
Example3.mdx. This can be found in the \Micro Drainage 2014\Data
directory.
Loading Schedules
The Schedules module is incorporated in System 1. Open System 1 using
your favourite Windows method. As usual, System 1 presents you with the
Open options box.
The box gives you the option to select the last file you saved or you can open
an existing file. Double click Open Existing File and go to the \Micro
Drainage 2014\Data directory and open Example3.mdx.
Select the Outfall Details option from the Network menu and enter the outfall
details as shown overleaf.
When you have checked that the data are correct click OK and return to the
Network Details. Input the data as shown for cover levels.
Example 3
Page 3.3
To see the Schedules spreadsheet click the Schedules button.

Schedules
Click the Schedules button again to return to the standard Network Details
spreadsheet. Input the data as shown for cover levels. Move down the column
as you enter the data by using the down keyboard arrow. When complete
return to the Schedules table to see the results below.
Schedules automatically assigns a number to each manhole. You will note

that the figures in the Depth column are shown in green. This is because the
values are less then prescribed cover of 0.9m (values that are twice the
prescribed cover will also be displayed in green). Entering the cover levels
will rectify this.
Manhole Schedules
To view the Manhole Schedule, select Manhole Schedule from the Results
menu or click the Manhole Schedule icon on the toolbar if you have added it.
Manhole Schedule
Longsections
Within Longsections, another key feature of Schedules is demonstrated.
Click the Show pipe bounds button.
Show pipe bounds
Page 3.4
Example 3
Note the purple and red lines, which delineate the upper and lower
boundaries for the network. The upper boundary (in purple) is dictated by the
required cover level of 0.900; the lower boundary (in red) is set by the
minimum outfall established in Design Criteria - in this case, 95.000m.
Intermediate ground levels

Schedules gives you the facility to examine intermediate ground levels, using
the GL 1/3 (m) and GL 2/3 (m) columns.
To test this resource return to the Schedules Network Details, click on the GL
1/3(m) column for pipe 1.000 and enter a value of 99.500. Enter a value of
100.000 for GL 2/3 (m), a warning appears in the Warning box at the foot of
the screen due to you do not having the prescribed cover.
This facility is particularly useful in instances where the line crosses an area
of uneven cover, such as a ditch. Schedules allows you to enter the data, but
warns you of the hazard. To see the effect, go to Longsections.
Example 3
Page 3.5
Changing manhole shapes

You can change the shape of the manholes from circular (set as default) to
rectangular, by simply specifying the Diameter/Length and Width of the
manholes. Click on the US/MH Diam/Len (mm) column for pipe 1.000 and
key in 1000 for the length and now click on US/MH Width (mm) column and
key in 750 for the Width. The value for the diameter of 1050 (mm)
disappears. Schedules shows the values in red, because you have specified
them rather than allowing the program to calculate automatically.
Note: The manhole diameters are designed in accordance with the
specifications in the Manhole size library. The option to Edit/Create a
Manhole Size library can be found in the Design Criteria form.
Making the Earth move

Within Schedules you have the facility to achieve a 'virtual' shift in the
location of true North. This resource is actually designed to make site work
easier by eliminating the need for complex Ordnance Survey coordinates and
orienting the site around a convenient local point, such as a site base line.
Within Example3 we shall use the following coordinates:
Page 3.6
Example 3
Enter these figures by selecting Manhole Coordinates from the Network

menu.
Match box
When you click OK, you are warned that your coordinates do not match the
pipe lengths.
In fact, the downstream Northing for 1.002 should have been 249864.400.
Normally the coordinates take precedence in a design. As the warning box
says, you can alter the pipe lengths to suit the coordinates. Click Repair
Lengths and click OK to the message advising you what has happened. Open
the Storm Network Details spreadsheet and you will see that the length of
1.002 has been reduced from 85m to 84.6m - a difference of 0.4m, matching
exactly the error in our coordinates.
However, in this instance it is the ground that is wrong, not the pipe. Re-open
the Manhole Coordinates and enter the correct downstream Northing for pipe
1.002. Click OK and once again select the Repair Lengths option. A look at
the Network Details confirms pipe 1.002 now has the correct length.
Example 3
Page 3.7
Oriental setting
Next choose Setting Out Information from the Results menu. With the True
Coordinates button selected, you can see that the system is actually oriented
at a significant angle away from true North; hence the elaborate coordinates.
Clearly, at midnight on a rainswept site, figures of this complexity do not

make the site manager's job easier. To redefine the orientation, select Site
Location from the Site menu and enter the coordinates for Manhole 1 and set
the Orientation to True - in this case, 20 degrees.
Click OK and return to the Setting Out Information. If you now choose the
Site Coordinates option, you will see that the orientation is now true North
Page 3.8
Example 3
and that the figures have been greatly simplified; they are all relative to
manhole 1.
Example 3
Page 3.9
Network Plan
With coordinates in place you can now view a plan view of the network.
Click the Plan icon:
Plan
The plan view of the network allows you to examine manholes and pipes "in
situ".
View Options
Drop down the View Options button menu and ensure the Display Manholes
and Display Pipe Numbers buttons are depressed.
Page 3.10
Example 3
Right click anywhere on the drawing and select Band Zoom.
Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to define a
banding region. Release the button to Zoom to the region chosen.
The Pan option allows you to move the area you are viewing by dragging it.
Alternatively you may also use the Wheel on your mouse to real time zoom.
Use Previous and Extents buttons to switch between magnifications.
Example 3
Page 3.11
3D World View
A full 3D graphical representation of your network is available in all modules
that have the Plan view.
Like the Plan the World View is based on manhole coordinates and
represents the true state of the world. Pipes without coordinates will have
default coordinates applied so they can be drawn on Plan and in 3D. This is
indicated on the Plan by the rings around each manhole. If the coordinates
and lengths do not match the pipes would be shown as dotted lines. As with
the other views right-clicking on a pipe or manhole and selecting Properties
will pop-up relevant information.
Select 3D World View from the Graphics menu or using the icon on the Plan
View tool bar.
Display World View
The World View will appear showing a full 3D model of the network and
ground.
The compass on the left gives you the ability to move around the network and
zoom into areas. Look around your system using the compass and
instructions overleaf.
Page 3.12
Example 3
In the upper toolbar there are a number of options allowing you to alter or
add to the items displayed.
View Options
Display Pipes / Manholes

These buttons switch the pipes and or manholes on and off.
Display Sky
This switches on a sky background. If switched off the background is left
black.
Display Branch Indicators
A flag is drawn at the first pipe in each branch. The integer part of the pipe is
shown in blue on the flag. A flag is also drawn at each outfall position. In this
case the branch number is drawn in green.
Example 3
Page 3.13
Ground Style
No Ground switches the ground profile off. The remaining three options
change the way the profile is drawn. The Ground may be drawn as Solid,
Wireframe or Transparent. The latter option allows the pipes to be seen
through the ground. The Ground is coloured from dark green through to light
green and then grey as the level increases.
Selection Set
By selecting this option it is possible to view only those pipes in the current
Selection Set. The pipes that are not in the selection set are displayed in a
greyed out manner.
Manhole Colours
By default manholes are shown in grey and all outfalls are shown in green.
The Cover Level option colour codes the manholes depending on their cover
level.
The levels associated with each colour can be seen on the Display Settings.
The Depth view colours each manhole according to depth. The depths
associated with each colour can be seen on the Display Settings.
The Connection option displays manholes in red if the connecting pipes are
within a pre-determined angle of each other. The angle can be set from
Display Settings.
Page 3.14
Example 3
Pipe Colours
By default the main line is drawn in yellow and branch lines are displayed in
cyan. The Diameter view colours pipes depending on their size (diameter).
The diameters associated with each colour can be seen on the Display
Settings.
Display Settings
The Display Setting window shows the various colour settings used in the
various graphical displays. Each colour can be user defined. Select the Pipes
Screen colour and the select a blue from the pallet.
Screen Defaults
Select Screen Default to return the Display Settings to the standard colours.
Save
Saves the current view to disk as a graphic file.
Print
Open a Print Preview of the World View which can be sent to a printer.
Example 3
Page 3.15
View Tab
Wireframe Pipes / Manholes

Pipes and manholes can be drawn as solid or wireframe.
Ground Overlay
If a background image is available from the Plan it may be merged with or
drawn in lieu of the ground profile. Select the On Ground option to merge the
image with the existing ground colour. Alternatively select Instead of Ground
to replace the standard ground colouring with the map image.
Polygon Detail
Change the detail level of the drawing elements. Lower levels will increase
frame rates on slower machines. This setting only affects solid polygons.
Wireframe elements are always drawn at Low detail.
Page 3.16
Example 3
Model Tab
Overlay Detail
Specify the size in pixels of the overlay map. Larger values make the image
clearer but use more memory and will reduce frame rate.
Horizontal Compression
The Horizontal compression scales the XY axis of the model to accentuate
falls.
Scale All Elements
With this option switched off only the pipe coordinates are scaled. Pipe and
Manhole dimensions are enlarged so they may be easily seen. This should be
taken into account if pipe clashes are being checked. Switch this option on to
show all the elements of the model in true scale (pipes become oval). For
most purposes this option can be left switched off.
Use TIN Ground Model
If a triangulation data set is available you may switch between a full
triangulated terrain model and the default ground generated from manhole
cover level only.
Use Flat Shading
By default the terrain model is smooth shaded. Flat shading may be more
appropriate if the terrain contains sharp edges (e.g. curbs).
Example 3
Page 3.17
Rebuild
Changing options on the Model tab will not automatically modify the model.
Click this button to rebuild the model with the new options.
+ and - Buttons
Rebuilds the model but moves the limits of those pipes included. Use + and
to change the limits of the model slightly.
Saving Schedules as text

Schedules gives you the option to save your work as text, for use within a
word processing package. This is particularly useful for producing high
quality proposals and presentations. To do this, simply choose Save ASCII
Manhole Schedules from the File menu. The Save ASCII dialogue box
appears. Key in the title of your choice and click Save.
Note: You cannot open this file from within Micro Drainage. To view your
work, use any popular word processing package, e.g. Microsoft Word,
WordPerfect, Lotus WordPro etc.
Alternatively click on the Schedules spreadsheet with the right mouse button.
The Export menu is displayed.
From here you can choose to Print the data, save it as a .csv, .pdf, html or
Excel format. This facility is available from all of the results spreadsheets
throughout the suite.
Page 3.18
Example 3
Longsection plots
We will now examine the use of the output of longsection images. The
Longsection module is embedded into System 1, Channel and Simulation.
Go to the File menu and select Plot Longsections. The Plot Preview form will
open.
The tabs on the left allow you to specify the parameters for the printouts.
The Plot Settings tab displays the variables used to batch the pipes for each
drawing. It allows you to choose which pipes are to be plotted and whether
you want to include branch lines in your selection. You can print the network
with the Hydraulic Grade Lines, which will show the Proportional Depth of
water in the pipes. The network can also be printed in Normal view (drawn
uphill from left to right) or Handed view (downhill from left to right).
Note: To change the page orientation, open Page Setup from the File menu
and select Landscape under Orientation.
Example 3
Page 3.19
The Plot to Printer tab determines the drawing format. A margin is drawn on
each page. The margin is applied around the edge of the page and between
the drawings if more than one drawing is plotted per page. The number of
drawings high/wide allows you to determine how many drawings across and
down the page are to be included in each plot.
Pages to Span specify the number of horizontal pages to be used to give the
overall plot.
Note: If you make any changes to the setup tabs then you must click
Update Preview for the changes to take effect.
The Plot to DXF tab lets you print your Longsection to DXF format.
Another facility available is the Plot Designer.
Page 3.20
Example 3
The Plot Designer allows you to add data to the drawings. Click the Plot
Setup icon in the lower toolbar.
Plot Designer
The Plot Designer will appear.
To add the data you require just drag it across from the data table to the top
or the bottom of the designer and the print preview will automatically update.
You can also change the colours. When you have the relevant data displayed
you can save your layout for future designs.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 11/02/2014
File Example3.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 21
Example 3
Schedules / Longsections
Plan / 3D
Checked by
Network 2014.1
Design Criteria for Example3

1
0
M5-60 (mm) 20.000
Ratio R 0.400
30
500
Network Design Table for Example3

PN
Length Fall Slope I.Area T.E.

Base
k
HYD DIA
(m)
1.000 26.000 1.000

1.001 50.000 1.667
26.0
30.0
0.250
0.500
5.00
0.00
10.0 0.600
0.0 0.600
o
o
150
225
2.000 20.000 0.250
80.0
0.010
5.00
0.0 0.600
100
3.000 35.500 0.473
75.1
0.020
5.00
0.0 0.600
100
1.002 85.000 0.850 100.0
0.250
0.00
0.0 0.600
300

PN
Rain
T.C.
(mm/hr) (mins)
US/IL
(m)
I.Area
Base
Foul Add Flow Vel
Cap
Flow
(ha)
Flow (l/s) (l/s)
(l/s)
(m/s) (l/s) (l/s)
1.000
1.001
5.00
5.00
5.22 100.000
5.57 98.925
0.250
0.750
10.0
10.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.98
2.40
35.0
95.3
13.4
20.2
2.000
5.00
5.39 100.000
0.010
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.86
6.8
0.1
3.000
5.00
5.67 100.000
0.020
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.89
7.0
0.3
1.002
5.00
6.57
1.030
10.0
0.0
0.0
1.57 111.1
23.9
97.183
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 11/02/2014
File Example3.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 22
Example 3
Plan / 3D
Checked by
Network 2014.1
Manhole Schedules for Example3
MH
MH
Name CL (m)
MH
Depth
(m)
MH
Connection
MH
Diam.,L*W
(mm)
PN
Pipe Out
Invert
Diameter
Level (m)
(mm)
1 101.250 1.250 Open Manhole 1000 x 750 1.000
100.000
150
3 101.240 1.240 Open Manhole
1200 2.000
100.000
100
1200 1.002
97.183
2 101.126 2.201 Open Manhole
1200 1.001
4 102.000 2.000 Open Manhole
1200 3.000
5 101.359 4.176 Open Manhole
98.500 2.167 Open Manhole
1500
98.925
100.000
OUTFALL
PN
225 1.000
Pipes In
Invert
Diameter Backdrop
Level (m)
(mm)
(mm)
99.000
150
300 1.001
97.258
225
3.000
99.527
100
100
2.000
1.002
99.750
96.333
100
300
2367
2144
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 11/02/2014
File Example3.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 23
Example 3
Plan / 3D
Checked by
Network 2014.1
PIPELINE SCHEDULES for Example3
Upstream Manhole
PN
Hyd Diam MH C.Level I.Level D.Depth

Sect (mm) Name
(m)
(m)
(m)
MH
Connection
MH DIAM., L*W
(mm)
1.000
1.001
o
o
150
225
1 101.250 100.000
2 101.126 98.925
1.100 Open Manhole

1.976 Open Manhole
1000 x 750
1200
2.000
100
3 101.240 100.000
1.140 Open Manhole
1200
3.000
100
4 102.000 100.000
1.900 Open Manhole
1200
1.002
300
5 101.359
3.876 Open Manhole
1200
97.183
Downstream Manhole
PN
Length Slope MH C.Level I.Level D.Depth

(m)
(1:X) Name
(m)
(m)
(m)
MH
Connection
MH DIAM., L*W
(mm)
1.000 26.000
1.001 50.000
26.0
30.0
2 101.126
5 101.359
99.000
97.258
1.976 Open Manhole

3.876 Open Manhole
1200
1200
2.000 20.000
80.0
5 101.359
99.750
1.509 Open Manhole
1200
3.000 35.500
75.1
5 101.359
99.527
1.732 Open Manhole
1200
96.333
1.867 Open Manhole
1500
1.002 85.000 100.0
98.500
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 11/02/2014
File Example3.mdx
XP Solutions
Example 3
Plan / 3D
Checked by
Network 2014.1
Setting Out Information - True Coordinates (Example3)
PN
USMH Dia/Len Width US Easting US Northing Layout

Name
(mm)
(mm)
(m)
(m)
(North)
1.000
1000
750 557102.000
249708.000
1.001
1200
557110.900
249732.400
2.000
1200
557108.000
249779.400
3.000
1200
557161.400
249767.200
1.002
1200
557128.000
249779.400
PN
1.002
DSMH Dia/Len Width DS Easting DS Northing Layout

Name
(mm)
(mm)
(m)
(m)
(North)
6
1500
557128.000
249864.400
Page 24
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 11/02/2014
File Example3.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 25
Example 3
Plan / 3D
Checked by
Network 2014.1
Setting Out Information - Site Coordinates (Example3)
PN
USMH Dia/Len Width US Easting US Northing Layout

Name
(mm)
(mm)
(m)
(m)
(North)
1.000
1000
1.001
2.000
0.000
0.000
1200
0.018
25.972
1200
-18.782
69.146
3.000
1200
35.570
75.946
1.002
1200
0.012
75.987
PN
1.002
750
DSMH Dia/Len Width DS Easting DS Northing Layout

Name
(mm)
(mm)
(m)
(m)
(North)
6
1500
-29.060
155.860
Free Flowing Outfall Details for Example3

D,L
W
Outfall
Min
Pipe Number
Name
(m)
(m)
I. Level (mm) (mm)
(m)
1.002
98.500
96.333
95.000 1500
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 11/02/2014
File Example3.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 26
Example 3
Plan / 3D
Checked by
Network 2014.1
MH Name
Hor Scale 1200

Ver Scale 250
Length (m)
50.000
100.000 101.250
Invert Level (m)
MH Name
98.925 101.126
99.000
100.000
101.359
97.258
Cover Level (m)
1.000
150
26.0
1.001
225
30.0
99.500
Datum (m)92.000
PN
Dia (mm)
Slope (1:X)
26.000
Hor Scale 1200

Ver Scale 250
Datum (m)91.000
PN
Dia (mm)
Slope (1:X)
Length (m)
98.500
97.183 101.359
Invert Level (m)
96.333
Cover Level (m)
1.002
300
100.0
85.000
Example 4
Page 4.1

Example 4 System1
Foul Sewer Design with Schedules
Page 4.2
Example 4
Introduction
This example details the design of a complete foul sewer network with
schedules using both the Main Drainage and Fixture Unit methods. This
Micro Drainage resource also aids the drafting and production of contract
documents.
Open System 1 and at the Open screen select New Foul Main Drainage.
Design Criteria
The Design Criteria window appears with default values set to produce the
design flows required for gravity sewers on residential developments of 4000
l/unit dwelling/24 hours in accordance with Sewers for Adoption.
Enter the additional data as shown and click OK.
Example 4
Page 4.3
Pipeline Details
The Foul Network Details spreadsheet now appears. Enter the data for the
following network:
Pipe Pipe
Fall Slope Area Houses
no
length [m] [m]
Base Pipe
US/IL
Flow Rough [m]
US/CL
[m]
1.000 26
80
58
101.100 R
25
75
26
2.000 89
45
15
54
50
22
3.000 25
25
36
1.002 52
75
29
75
3.2
54
1.500
100
Pipe
DIA
101.200 R
R
100
101.250 R
100.925 R
100
101.145 R
100.525 R
97.500
Here pipes 1.000 to 1.002 serve a housing development. Pipe 1.003 serves an
industrial development. Therefore, the industrial flow has been specified in
litres/second/hectare and the domestic flow has been input in terms of the
number of houses contributing.
It is assumed you have to meet an existing system which is at 95m AOD. In
order to make sure our outfall hits 95m, select Outfall Details from the
Network menu, enter the following additional data and click OK.
Click Full Optimise to improve the design and save your work as Example4.
Page 4.4
Example 4
Optimise has re-designed the network to produce the optimum cover at 0.9m
throughout the network and also a minimum Full Bore Velocity of 0.75
m/sec for each pipe. To provide a self-cleansing regime within foul gravity
sewers, the minimum flow velocity should be 0.75 m/sec at one third design
flow. Optimise has the ability to re-design the network so that it achieves
0.75 m/sec at one third design flow.
Select the optimise to P.Vel at 1/3 Flow option on the toolbar as shown
below.
Then click the Full Optimise button.
Example 4
Page 4.5
The results table shows that the minimum of 0.75 m/sec hasn't been achieved
in all cases. Pipes 1.000, 2.000, 2.001 and 3.000 all have a Proportional
Velocity of less than 0.75 m/sec at 1/3 design flow.
Pipe 1.000 is a 150mm pipe with 58 connections (houses). It has been laid at
a slope of 1:150 in accordance with Sewers for Adoption.
Pipes 2.000 and 2.001 are 100mm pipes with more than 10 connections. They
have been laid at a slope of 1:80 in accordance with BS EN 752.
Pipe 3.000 is also a 100mm pipe with more than 10 connections and is also
subject to the minimum slope (1:80) requirements of BS EN 752. Optimise
has increased the slope for this pipe to 1:40.3 to maintain 0.9m cover.
Optimise has combined minimum velocity rules, minimum slope
recommendations and minimum cover requirements to produce an acceptable
design.
Note: See also Help System 1 Optimise
Click Save to save the new design.
Page 4.6
Example 4
Schedules
Select Manhole Schedule from the Results menu. System 1 has automatically
designed manhole sizes in accordance with the specification set in the
Manhole Size library.
A look at Longsections will show you that the network has been designed
satisfactorily.
You should now have a complete drainage design ready for the production of
contract documents.
Discharge Unit Methods

A second version of Foul can be accessed within System 1 that allows a
network to be designed by specifying a number of discharge units in lieu of
houses. Both the BS 8301 and EN 752 methodologies are supported.
From the Site menu select the Network Manager option and change the
Network Type to Foul Unit as shown below. Rename the network Foul
Unit in the Name column and then close the form.
Example 4
Page 4.7
At the Design Criteria form select the BS 8301 option and make sure all the
other data is as shown.
Click OK to the Design Criteria and the Network Details will appear.
The houses entered for the Main Drainage method have been converted to
units at a rate of 14 units per house.
Change optimse to P.Vel at 1/3 Flow again and click Optimise to re-design
the network.
Page 4.8
Example 4
On inspection the results show that the Fixture Unit method produces
different results to the Main Drainage method. The Fixture Unit method is
more applicable to smaller sites (less than 300 houses) whilst the Main
Drainage is more applicable to larger sites. The Fixture Unit method should
also be used on sites where there is a mixture of commercial, industrial and
residential properties.
Finally we will demonstrate how the EN 752 method can be used. Select
Design Criteria from the Network menu.
Change the Unit Calculation Method to be used to EN 752 and set the
Frequency Factor (EN 752 Only) to 0.5. This is a typical frequency factor to
be used for dwellings as stated in table C.1 (BS EN 752).
Click OK to the Design Criteria and the Network Details will appear. Upon
examining the results you will see that no conversion from houses to units
has occurred when using the EN 752 method.
For this site there are roughly 12 units per dwelling based on the typical
values of discharge units (DU) in table C.2 (BS EN 752).
Example 4
Page 4.9
Enter the Units for each pipe as shown below.
Click the Full Optimise button to optimise the network to proportional

velocity at 1/3 design flow.
The Results now show the system re-designed to achieve proportional

velocity at 1/3 design flow. Where this cannot be achieved the minimum
slope recommendations and minimum cover requirements have been applied
to produce an acceptable design.
On sites where there is a mixture of commercial, industrial and residential
properties a Frequency Factor (kDU) can be applied per pipe in accordance
with Table C.1 (BS EN 752).
Page 4.10
Example 4
To specify a Frequency Factor per pipe select Preferences from the toolbar.
Go to the Input tab and tick the Freq Factor option.
Click OK and the network details will now show an additional column
allowing a Frequency Factor (kDU) to be set per pipe.
Printing
This follows the same procedure as the previous example.
Example 4
Page 4.11
Combining Storm and Foul flows
Micro Drainage gives you the facility to analyse simultaneous Storm and
Foul flows through a network. To do this, select Network Manager from the
Site menu. Test Combined Sewer can be selected from the Toolbar. A copy
of the existing network is created as a Storm network or vice versa if a Storm
network that you are copying. You are then prompted to enter the Design
Criteria for your Storm or Foul flow. Clicking OK presents you with a
Network Details spreadsheet, which analyses the dry weather flow condition.
Note: In fact, a combined system would usually be analysed first within the
System 1 module as a Storm file. You can enter the Foul flow in the Design
Criteria window; it is specified in litres/second/hectare. Although this
figure is only an approximation, it is suitable for combined analysis since it
represents only a small percentage of the total flow. For more detailed
analysis of dry weather flow in particular, you can then transfer the data to
Foul as described above. This enables you to specify the foul sewage in
greater detail and to observe the proportional velocities of flow through the
system when it is not raining.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 26/02/2014
File Example4.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 12
Example 4
System 1 - Foul Sewer Design
with Schedules
Checked by
Network 2014.1
FOUL SEWERAGE DESIGN
Design Criteria for Foul - Main
Industrial Flow (l/s/ha)

1.00
20
Industrial Peak Flow Factor
3.00
Flow Per Person (l/per/day) 222.00
Persons per House
3.00 Min Design Depth for Optimisation (m) 0.900
Domestic (l/s/ha)
0.00
Domestic Peak Flow Factor
6.00
500
Network Design Table for Foul - Main

PN
Length Fall Slope Area Houses

Base
k
HYD DIA
(m)
(m) (1:X) (ha)
Flow (l/s) (mm) SECT (mm)
1.000 26.000 0.173 150.0 0.000

1.001 25.000 0.402 62.2 0.000
58
26
5.0 1.500
0.0 1.500
o
o
150
150
2.000 89.000 1.113

2.001 54.000 0.675
80.0 0.000
80.0 0.000
15
22
0.0 1.500
0.0 1.500
o
o
100
100
3.000 25.000 0.620
40.3 0.000
36
0.0 1.500
100
1.002 52.000 1.963 26.5 0.000

1.003 54.000 0.500 108.0 3.200
29
0
0.0 1.500
0.0 1.500
o
o
150
225

PN
US/IL
(m)
Area
Base
Hse Add Flow P.Dep P.Vel Vel
Cap
Flow
(ha) Flow (l/s)
(l/s)
(mm) (m/s) (m/s) (l/s) (l/s)
1.000 100.050
1.001 99.877
0.000
0.000
5.0
5.0
58
84
1.5
1.8
95
79
0.78
1.13
0.71
1.11
12.6
19.6
9.2
10.7
2.000 100.250
2.001 99.138
0.000
0.000
0.0
0.0
15
37
0.1
0.3
26
41
0.52
0.68
0.74
0.74
5.8
5.8
0.8
2.1
3.000 100.145
0.000
0.0
36
0.3
34
0.86
1.05
8.2
2.0
1.002
1.003
0.000
3.200
5.0
5.0
186
186
2.7
4.6
79
130
1.74
1.17
1.71
1.10
30.2
43.9
16.3
27.8
98.413
96.375
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 26/02/2014
File Example4.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 13
Example 4
with Schedules
Checked by
Network 2014.1
Manhole Schedules for Foul - Main
MH
MH
Name CL (m)
MH
Depth
(m)
MH
Connection
MH
Diam.,L*W
(mm)
PN
Pipe Out
Invert
Diameter
Level (m)
(mm)
1 101.100 1.050 Open Manhole
1200 1.000
100.050
2 101.200 1.323 Open Manhole
1200 1.001
99.877
3 101.250 1.000 Open Manhole
1200 2.000
100.250
4 100.925 1.787 Open Manhole
1200 2.001
99.138
5 101.145 1.000 Open Manhole
1200 3.000
100.145
6 100.525 2.113 Open Manhole
1200 1.002
98.413
1200 1.003
1200
PN
Pipes In
Invert
Diameter Backdrop
Level (m)
(mm)
(mm)
150
150 1.000
99.877
150
99.138
100
150 1.001
99.475
150
2.001
98.463
100
100
100 2.000
100
3.000
99.525
100
96.375
225 1.002
96.450
150
OUTFALL
1.003
95.875
225
1063
1063
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 26/02/2014
File Example4.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 14
Example 4
with Schedules
Checked by
Network 2014.1
PIPELINE SCHEDULES for Foul - Main
Upstream Manhole
PN
Hyd Diam MH C.Level I.Level D.Depth

Sect (mm) Name
(m)
(m)
(m)
MH
Connection
MH DIAM., L*W
(mm)
1.000
1.001
o
o
150
150
1 101.100 100.050
2 101.200 99.877
0.900 Open Manhole

1.173 Open Manhole
1200
1200
2.000
2.001
o
o
100
100
3 101.250 100.250
4 100.925 99.138
0.900 Open Manhole

1.687 Open Manhole
1200
1200
3.000
100
5 101.145 100.145
0.900 Open Manhole
1200
1.002
1.003
o
o
150
225
6 100.525
7 97.500
1.963 Open Manhole

0.900 Open Manhole
1200
1200
98.413
96.375
Downstream Manhole
PN
Length Slope MH C.Level I.Level D.Depth

(m)
(1:X) Name
(m)
(m)
(m)
MH
Connection
MH DIAM., L*W
(mm)
1.000 26.000 150.0

1.001 25.000 62.2
2 101.200
6 100.525
99.877
99.475
1.173 Open Manhole

0.900 Open Manhole
1200
1200
2.000 89.000
2.001 54.000
80.0
80.0
4 100.925
6 100.525
99.138
98.463
1.687 Open Manhole

1.963 Open Manhole
1200
1200
3.000 25.000
40.3
6 100.525
99.525
0.900 Open Manhole
1200
7
8
96.450
95.875
0.900 Open Manhole

0.900 Open Manhole
1200
1200
1.002 52.000 26.5

1.003 54.000 108.0
97.500
97.000
Free Flowing Outfall Details for Foul - Main

D,L
W
Outfall
Min
Pipe Number
Name
(m)
(m)
I. Level (mm) (mm)
(m)
1.003
97.000
95.875
95.000 1200
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 23/12/2013
File Example4.mdx
XP Solutions
MH Name
Page 15
Example 4
with Schedules
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
F8
F7
F6
F1
F2
Hor Scale 2500

Ver Scale 250
54.000
F6
52.000
99.975 101.100
F1.001F1.000
225
225
65.5 134.6
99.782 101.200
99.782
97.500
97.000
Length (m)
MH Name
F1.002
225
18.7
96.300
96.375
Invert Level (m)
95.800
Cover Level (m)
F1.003
300
108.0
99.159 100.525
99.400
Datum (m)91.000
PN
Dia (mm)
Slope (1:X)
25.00026.000
F4
F3
Hor Scale 2500

Ver Scale 250
Length (m)
F2.000
150
150.0
99.607 100.925
99.607
99.234
Invert Level (m)
100.525
Cover Level (m)
F2.001
150
145.0
54.000
100.200 101.250
Datum (m)93.000
PN
Dia (mm)
Slope (1:X)
89.000
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 23/12/2013
File Example4.mdx
XP Solutions
MH Name
Example 4
with Schedules
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
F6
F5
Hor Scale 2500

Ver Scale 250
100.095 101.145
Invert Level (m)
99.475
Cover Level (m)
F3.000
150
40.3
100.525
Datum (m)92.000
PN
Dia (mm)
Slope (1:X)
Length (m)
25.000
Page 16
Example 5
Page 5.1

Example 5 - Source Control
Design of a storm water storage lake
Page 5.2
Example 5
Introduction
In this example we are going to work with the Source Control module to
design a tank/pond to serve as a landscaping water feature.
Design criteria
The tank/pond shall provide sufficient storage to limit the run-off

from a 26.9ha (paved area) site to 1300 l/s during a storm of a 100
year return period for both summer and winter storms.
No drainage point (or top of embankments) is to be lower than

500mm above the 100 year storm top water level.
The overflow should be capable of passing a storm of a 1000 year

return period without the water level rising to within 200mm of the
top of the embankment.
The following picture shows a permanent water feature with 1.5m available
for storage:
Loading Source Control
Follow your preferred procedure for opening Source Control.

Before proceeding with a design it is useful to obtain an estimate of the
storage requirements in order to establish the parameters within which we
will be working. Therefore at the Source Control Open screen, choose Quick
Storage Estimate.
Example 5
Page 5.3
Quick Storage Estimate
Enter the data as shown in the example below - some of the figures are
default values. When you are satisfied that the data are correct, click Analyse.
Source Control tells you that it is performing full routing calculations. The
following information box gives you the results:
Make a note of these parameters and click OK. The Global Variables appear
to begin a more detailed design.
Page 5.4
Example 5
Global Variables
Check that the options shown match the entries shown on the example below.
If they do not, you can select them by using the mouse and clicking on the
arrows at the side of each box, or by using Tab and the keyboard arrows.
Rainfall & Network Details
Click OK and Source Control opens the Rainfall & Network Details form:
We are going to run both Summer and Winter storms so make sure they are
both selected.
Note: The Cv value for winter is higher than for summer as UCWI is on
average 50mm higher in winter.
Example 5
Page 5.5
The program assumes no upstream network unless a Storage Volume is

entered. If a storage volume is entered the other details can be entered which
the software uses to calculate the relationship between discharge and
proportional cross sectional area which may affect the Inflow Hydrograph if
there is significant upstream storage.
Enter the data as shown on the previous page - again using Tab and the
arrows or the mouse, according to your preference - and click OK.
Time Area Diagram
Your next screen will be the Time Area Diagram spreadsheet. Enter the data
as shown in the right-hand column. To do this, simply highlight each box by
clicking or using the keyboard arrows and then keying in the value. Then
click OK.
Note: In a real project, Time/Area details saved in the System1 module (for
storm networks) under the File menu may be loaded into the above
spreadsheet. Click the Import button to search for files with the .tadx or
.tad extension.
Page 5.6
Example 5
Plan Area of Pond
Next you will see the Tank or Pond dialogue box:
After entering the Cover Level and Invert Level you can select the depth
increment required or type in only the heights at which the shape of the pond
changes. For this example click 0.1 button to set the depth increment at 0.1m.
You can enter the Area at each depth increment using the Repeat button as
required. However, for this example, enter 4250m at depth 0.0m. Click the
calculator button and the Shape Calculator form appears. We will use this to
set the Side Slope at 1:4. We could also use the calculator to set the volume.
Note: Shape Calculator will set the side slope or volume for the entire
depth if one cell is selected or the highlighted section if more than one
cell is selected.
Example 5
Page 5.7
If we click on each area cell the available volume is displayed in the bottom
left hand corner, for 1.5 m depth this is within our Quick Storage Estimate
range. When you are satisfied the data are correct, click OK.
Note: Scale Factor enables you to adjust the values of the data without reentering the entire array. Simply enter the increment by which you wish
to increase or decrease the values and click Scale.
Setting Parameters
Source Control next moves to the Weir Outflow Control dialogue box. We
will use the Calculator to size the weir based on the required outflow so click
the Calculator icon and enter the details as shown.
Page 5.8
Example 5
A weir width of 415mm is suggested. Click Apply to accept this size, enter
the other weir values as shown below and click OK.
Repeat this procedure with the Weir Overflow Control dialogue box.
Click OK and then hit the Go button in the toolbar.

Run Analysis
The drop down arrow allows you to choose the increment at which to analyse
the structure. The default is the finest increment.
Example 5
Summary of Results
Page 5.9
Source Control performs the final routing calculations, presenting you with a
request to save the data. Click Yes and save the data as Example5. At the
conclusion of the Save procedure Source Control presents you with the
summary of results for the 100 year return period for both summer and winter
storms:
Page 5.10
Example 5
Full routing tables
To view a detailed result, click the Hydrograph Tables icon in the toolbar.
Hydrograph Tables
Source Control opens the Hydrograph Tables, beginning with a Winter storm
of 120 minutes duration as this is the critical storm.
Use the scroll bar to the right of the table to view the effects of the storm in
its entirety. The Storm Selector allows the summer/winter analysis of any of
the storm durations to be viewed.
Example 5
Page 5.11
Graphs
Next, select the Graphs icon.

Graphs
Source Control displays the Graphs screen.
Once again, you can choose to view either summer or winter and you can
change the storm duration using the Storm Selector. You will note also that
Source Control presents you with several options for viewing the graphs
themselves. Select these simply by clicking on each graph icon on the Graph
toolbar turn on all the options to see the layout above.
Note - window management: For easy switching between results
windows, you can use the Tile or Cascade commands under the Window
menu. As set out in Example 1, you can re-size the windows according to
preference.
Page 5.12
Example 5
Animation
Source Control allows you view your results in the form of an animated
simulation of a storm. To experiment with this, click on the Animation icon.
Animation
A Video Controls box appears which features icons that replicate the
functions of a standard media player. Click Play.
The Animation also gives you the option to view either summer or winter
storms. Select 120 min Winter from the Storm Selector. The drawing features
a red disk, which signifies the critical level for the design. An animated blue
disk indicates the level during the course of the storm.
To view the Trace option, ensure the button is depressed and press Play
again, you will see the level animated in pale blue, giving you a time elapsed
picture of the storm.
Example 5
Page 5.13
Press Play again and pause the storm when the timer reaches 76 minutes. You
can now use the Forward and Rewind buttons to watch the flow minute-byminute. To re-start the animation at any point, simply press Stop, followed by
Play.
Printing
To print, hit the Print icon.

Print
The Print dialogue box appears.
print by clicking in the appropriate box. Click the Update Preview button to
see a print preview. When you are satisfied with the selected options click the
printer icon at the top of the form to send the job to the printer.
Page 5.14
Example 5
Testing overflows
Before proceeding to look at the results in detail, it is appropriate now to test

the overflow for capacity.
Close all the results forms down except the Summary of Results. The
Window menu will help you to identify forms that are still open.
From Table 7.2. Ciria Book 14 (based on ''Floods and reservoir safety, an
engineering guide, Institution of Civil Engineers'') let us assume that a breach
of the reservoir will pose negligible risk to life and cause limited damage.
This will require the overflow to be tested for a 1000 year return period
(annual probability of 0.1%).
Select Rainfall Details from the Edit menu.
Source Control returns you to the Rainfall and Network Details dialogue box.
Change the return period from 100 to 1000 years and click OK.
You will notice that as soon as you have clicked OK the software will reanalyse the data and update the Summary of Results. This is because the
default settings in Preferences are set to Maintain Results. If you prefer to use
the Go button to run the analysis you can select the Preferences from the File
menu and change the Analysis to User.
Click the Save icon to save the file as Example5. Source Control will
automatically replace the old example with the new. You will note that the
summary of results shows a maximum depth of 1.786m, which is still within
our 1.8m limit (i.e. 200mm below the embankment) but the Status column is
displaying Flood Risk. The margin for Flood Risk warning can also be edited
via Preferences. Remember that this is a test only for the capacity of the
overflow; if it were inadequate we would increase the length, not the storage.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example5.srcx
XP Solutions
Page 15
Example 5
Source Control
Storm Water Storage Lake
Checked by
Source Control 2014.0 (Beta 2)
Summary of Results for 100 year Return Period
Storm
Event
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Max
Level
(m)
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Storm
Event
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Status
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Depth Control Overflow Outflow Volume
(m)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(m)
100.937 0.937
641.1
0.0
641.1 4399.9
101.151 1.151
872.9
0.0
872.9 5528.4
101.290 1.290 1035.7
0.0
1035.7 6285.7
101.349 1.349 1108.2
0.0
1108.2 6616.2
101.346 1.346 1103.9
0.0
1103.9 6596.2
101.320 1.320 1072.1
0.0
1072.1 6453.5
101.255 1.255
994.4
0.0
994.4 6096.1
101.191 1.191
919.4
0.0
919.4 5748.1
101.133 1.133
852.5
0.0
852.5 5432.6
101.081 1.081
794.5
0.0
794.5 5154.0
100.993 0.993
699.4
0.0
699.4 4691.5
100.864 0.864
567.6
0.0
567.6 4027.6
100.737 0.737
447.6
0.0
447.6 3391.1
100.652 0.652
372.5
0.0
372.5 2973.4
100.542 0.542
282.3
0.0
282.3 2442.5
100.473 0.473
229.8
0.0
229.8 2113.1
100.424 0.424
195.1
0.0
195.1 1885.6
100.387 0.387
170.1
0.0
170.1 1714.5
100.358 0.358
151.3
0.0
151.3 1579.9
101.031 1.031
740.5
0.0
740.5 4893.4
101.249 1.249
986.7
0.0
986.7 6061.3
101.420 1.420 1196.2
0.0
1196.2 7012.7
101.460 1.460 1247.1
0.0
1247.1 7242.3
101.429 1.429 1208.2
0.0
1208.2 7068.8
101.379 1.379 1144.7
0.0
1144.7 6781.6
101.275 1.275 1018.3
0.0
1018.3 6206.5
101.185 1.185
911.8
0.0
911.8 5710.6
Rain
Flooded Discharge Overflow Time-Peak
(mins)
Volume
Volume
(mm/hr) Volume
(m)
(m)
(m)
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
98.681
64.789
40.510
24.461
17.964
14.342
10.418
8.302
6.956
6.017
4.784
3.456
2.493
1.975
1.421
1.124
0.936
0.806
0.710
98.681
64.789
40.510
24.461
17.964
14.342
10.418
8.302
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4907.9
6451.1
8144.3
9849.6
10851.2
11551.9
12587.5
13374.2
14007.1
14539.4
15407.1
16684.2
18097.6
19115.3
20598.5
21759.5
22656.8
23404.9
24033.6
5488.7
7238.9
9133.5
11033.9
12155.8
12940.6
14100.6
14981.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
37
47
66
100
132
166
232
296
358
422
546
792
1160
1520
2256
2960
3688
4424
5152
37
51
68
104
140
174
242
308
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example5.srcx
XP Solutions
Page 16
Example 5
Source Control
Checked by
Storm
Event
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Max
Level
(m)
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Storm
Event
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Status
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Depth Control Overflow Outflow Volume
(m)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(m)
101.107 1.107
823.3
0.0
823.3 5292.6
101.040 1.040
750.2
0.0
750.2 4939.3
100.933 0.933
637.0
0.0
637.0 4381.1
100.785 0.785
492.0
0.0
492.0 3631.4
100.650 0.650
370.8
0.0
370.8 2962.9
100.564 0.564
299.7
0.0
299.7 2548.2
100.459 0.459
219.7
0.0
219.7 2048.3
100.395 0.395
175.4
0.0
175.4 1749.8
100.350 0.350
146.6
0.0
146.6 1546.3
100.318 0.318
126.7
0.0
126.7 1397.7
100.293 0.293
112.0
0.0
112.0 1283.2
Rain
(mins)
Volume
Volume
(mm/hr) Volume
(m)
(m)
(m)
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
6.956
6.017
4.784
3.456
2.493
1.975
1.421
1.124
0.936
0.806
0.710
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
15691.0
16287.3
17259.7
18692.3
20270.6
21411.1
23077.3
24371.2
25376.7
26216.0
26926.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
374
438
564
810
1180
1544
2268
3008
3744
4432
5160
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example5.srcx
XP Solutions
Example 5
Source Control
Checked by
Page 17
Model Details
Storage is Online Cover Level (m) 102.000
Tank or Pond Structure

Invert Level (m) 100.000
Depth (m) Area (m) Depth (m) Area (m) Depth (m) Area (m) Depth (m) Area (m) Depth (m) Area (m)
0.000
0.100
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
4250.0
4342.9
4436.9
4531.8
4627.8
4724.8
0.600
0.700
0.800
0.900
1.000
1.100
4822.7
4921.7
5021.7
5122.7
5224.7
5327.7
1.200
1.300
1.400
1.500
1.600
1.700
5431.7
5536.7
5642.7
5749.7
5857.7
5966.7
1.800
1.900
2.000
2.100
2.200
2.300
6076.8
6187.8
6299.9
6412.9
6527.0
6642.0
Weir Outflow Control

Discharge Coef 0.544 Width (m) 0.415 Invert Level (m) 100.000
Weir Overflow Control

2.400
2.500
6758.1
6875.2
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example5.srcx
XP Solutions
Example 5
Source Control
Checked by
Event: 120 min Winter
Page 18
Example 6
Page 6.1

Design of a storm water tank sewer
Page 6.2
Example 6
Introduction
In this example we are going to design a tank sewer (circular pipe) to limit
the discharge from a 0.45ha site to 16 litres/second during storms of 30 year
return period. We will use a Hydro-Brake as our control.
Quick Storage Estimate
Follow the procedure set out in Example 5 to choose the Quick Storage
Estimate option.
In this example we are going to use FEH rainfall data that can be obtained
from the FEH CD produced by the Institute of Hydrology (now known as the
Centre for Ecology and Hydrology). The FEH data for this example is
contained in the file Example6.csv . This file can be found in your \Micro
Drainage 2014\Data directory. Change the Region to FEH Rainfall by
selecting it from the drop down list and click the Browse button to the right
of the Site Location box to load in the Example6.csv file (FEH Rainfall
models can also be loaded in .xml file format). Enter the remaining data as
below and click Analyse.
Example 6
Page 6.3
The results from the QSE will appear showing the storage requirements to be
between 75m and 114m for the variables stated above. The variation in
storage is dependent on the type of control, structure and the shape of the
storage. It is therefore very important to analyse the actual storage structure,
as approximations may produce significant error. For example, do not assume
a constant flow rate through an orifice - it varies greatly with depth.
Click OK on the results form and the Global Variables will be opened.
Global Variables
At the Source Control Global Variables box, select the options as shown,
using the mouse or tab and the keyboard arrows.
Page 6.4
Example 6
Rainfall and Network Details
Click OK to the Global Variables and the Rainfall And Network Details
dialogue box is presented. All the data entered for the Quick Storage
Estimate will automatically be pulled across. We intend to run both Summer
and Winter storms again so make sure they are selected and click OK.
Note: No entries are required for the Network Details column in this
instance. This is because routing the flow through the pipe network does
not normally result in a significant reduction in the storage facility size, for
two reasons:
The total storage in the pipe network is small compared with most
storage facilities.
The peak flow in the pipe network does not usually coincide with
the peak storage in the storage facility, i.e. when the storage facility
is full, the pipe network is not.
Example 6
Page 6.5
Time Area Diagram
At the Time Area Diagram, enter the following data:

0 to 4 minutes
0.3
4 to 8 minutes
0.15
When you have checked that the data are correct, click OK.
Pipe Details
Now enter the Pipe Details as shown below, then click OK.
Note: 50m of 1.5m pipe gives 88.4m of storage - between 75m and
114m, as calculated within the Quick Storage Estimate.
Page 6.6
Example 6
Outflow Control
You will now see the Hydro-Brake Outflow Control dialogue box. Enter the
data as shown.
The outflow curve is generated automatically. Click OK to accept the data

and click the Go button.
Example 6
Results
Page 6.7
Your Summary of Results should be as below and will show the results for
both the summer and winter storms. From these you can see the maximum
storage occurs for the 30 minute winter storm duration. The depth of water
above the outfall invert of the tank sewer is 1.709m. The maximum discharge
is 15.6 l/s.
Page 6.8
Example 6
Animation
Once again you have an animation facility with which to examine the levels
at each stage of a storm. Choose 3D Animation from the View menu.
Again you have the option to view either summer or winter storms. Select 30
Winter (the critical storm) from the Storm Selector.
It is possible to move around the structure by clicking on the compass. The
full list of motion controls are discussed in Example 3.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example 6.srcx
XP Solutions
Example 6
Source Control
Storm Water Tank Sewer
Checked by
Storm
Event
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Summer
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
Storm
Event
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Max
Level
(m)
Status
Max
Max
Max
Depth Control Volume
(m)
(l/s)
(m)
101.807
101.885
101.859
101.763
101.685
101.612
101.480
101.364
101.262
101.170
101.004
100.668
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
101.963
102.109
102.094
101.918
101.787
101.670
101.470
101.302
Rain
(mm/hr)
1.407
14.4
66.5
O K
1.485
14.7
71.4
O K
1.459
14.6
69.8
O K
1.363
14.2
63.6
O K
1.285
13.9
58.1
O K
1.212
13.6
52.9
O K
1.080
13.0
43.3
O K
0.964
12.5
34.9
O K
0.862
12.1
27.7
O K
0.770
11.6
21.7
O K
0.604
10.9
12.4
O K
0.268
10.2
1.9
O K
0.000
7.9
0.0
O K
0.000
6.3
0.0
O K
0.000
4.7
0.0
O K
0.000
3.8
0.0
O K
0.000
3.2
0.0
O K
0.000
2.8
0.0
O K
0.000
2.5
0.0
O K
1.563
15.0
75.8
O K
1.709
15.6
82.4
O K
1.694
15.5
81.8
O K
1.518
14.8
73.3
O K
1.387
14.3
65.1
O K
1.270
13.8
57.1
O K
1.070
13.0
42.6
O K
0.902
12.2
30.5
O K
Flooded Discharge Time-Peak
(mins)
Volume
Volume
(m)
(m)
95.811
56.492
33.309
19.640
14.419
11.580
8.502
6.828
5.760
5.013
4.013
2.933
2.144
1.716
1.279
1.038
0.882
0.773
0.691
95.811
56.492
33.309
19.640
14.419
11.580
8.502
6.828
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
80.6
95.5
112.8
132.1
146.2
156.6
172.5
184.3
194.4
203.0
216.8
237.5
260.5
278.0
310.7
336.2
357.3
375.6
391.8
90.4
107.0
125.3
148.0
163.7
175.6
192.8
206.7
19
32
52
84
120
152
218
282
344
404
520
750
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
19
32
56
92
128
164
232
298
Page 9
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example 6.srcx
XP Solutions
Example 6
Source Control
Checked by
Storm
Event
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
min Winter
Storm
Event
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Max
Level
(m)
Status
Max
Max
Max
Depth Control Volume
(m)
(l/s)
(m)
101.157
101.023
100.714
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
100.400
Rain
(mm/hr)
0.757
11.6
20.9
O K
0.623
11.0
13.3
O K
0.314
10.2
2.7
O K
0.000
7.8
0.0
O K
0.000
5.7
0.0
O K
0.000
4.6
0.0
O K
0.000
3.4
0.0
O K
0.000
2.8
0.0
O K
0.000
2.3
0.0
O K
0.000
2.1
0.0
O K
0.000
1.8
0.0
O K
(mins)
Volume
Volume
(m)
(m)
5.760
5.013
4.013
2.933
2.144
1.716
1.279
1.038
0.882
0.773
0.691
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
217.7
227.3
242.6
266.1
291.7
311.4
348.0
376.5
400.2
420.7
438.9
358
416
528
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page 10
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example 6.srcx
XP Solutions
Example 6
Source Control
Checked by
Page 11
Model Details
Pipe Structure
Diameter (m) 1.500 Slope (1:X) 70.000 Length (m) 50.000 Invert Level (m) 100.400
Hydro-Brake Outflow Control

Design Head (m) 2.200 Hydro-Brake Type Md6 SW Only Invert Level (m) 100.000
Design Flow (l/s) 16.0
Diameter (mm)
137
Depth (m) Flow (l/s) Depth (m) Flow (l/s) Depth (m) Flow (l/s) Depth (m) Flow (l/s) Depth (m) Flow (l/s)
0.100
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
4.5
9.5
10.5
10.2
9.8
9.6
0.800
1.000
1.200
1.400
1.600
1.800
10.0
10.9
11.8
12.7
13.5
14.4
2.000
2.200
2.400
2.600
3.000
3.500
15.1
15.9
16.6
17.3
18.5
20.0
4.000
4.500
5.000
5.500
6.000
6.500
21.4
22.7
23.9
25.1
26.2
27.3
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
28.3
29.3
30.3
31.2
32.1
33.0
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example 6.srcx
XP Solutions
Example 6
Source Control
Checked by
Event: 30 min Winter
Page 12
Example 7
Page 7.1

Example 7 - Simulation
Simulation of a drainage system
with tank sewers
Page 7.2
Example 7
Introduction
The following system has been designed to illustrate a large number of

features in a small network. It should be studied closely by any user who
intends to introduce storage into a system in order to alleviate flooding.
The following facilities are demonstrated:
Determine flooding in a system with a limited discharge.

Identify the pipes responsible for that flooding.
The use of online controls to improve the performance of storage
tanks.
Pumping.
The use of additional offline controls.
The use of looped controls.
The data for this example is contained in the file Example7.mdx. This can be
found in the \Micro Drainage 2014\Data directory.
Loading Simulation
Open Simulation using your preferred method. At the Open screen, select
Open Existing File. The familiar Open File dialogue box now appears.
Example7.mdx should feature on the list of files, enabling you to open the
file simply by double clicking. If it is not shown, it can be found on the
installation DVD supplied. The file will be opened with the Simulation
Criteria screen.
You are now ready to commence the simulation project.
Example 7
Page 7.3
The network
We are going to simulate the following network:
Pipes 2.000 and 3.000 have been enlarged to provide potential storage in the
system. 3.000 has no flow associated with it and is used purely as storage to
reduce the water level upstream of 1.004 and consequently reduce the flows
in 1.004 itself. The network must discharge no more than 50 l/s with no
flooding for the 30 year return period.
Note: The above network is contained in the file Example7.mdx.
However if you cannot find this file, simply input the system. The
network details can be found on the output accompanying this example.
The procedure is similar to that detailed in Example 1 of this manual. The
data is first input in the System 1 program and then Scheduled before it
can be simulated. Note that upsizing of pipes in System 1 is prevented
by setting the maximum rainfall to zero in the Design Criteria or by
using the not allowed auto design option (only if A.P.T. is installed).
Flood risk
Simulation allows you to preset the level at which it will warn you that there
is a serious risk of flooding. Call up the Preferences dialogue box from the
File menu.
Page 7.4
Example 7
The default value for flood warning is 300mm. The effect will be shown in
the Summary of Results. As a general rule Engineers should not design for
the water level to be immediately below the cover level.
Check the Analysis is set to Maintain Results. With this selected Simulation
will reanalyse the network automatically each time the network is edited.
Summary forms will be updated without the need to close and reload them.
Simulation Criteria
At the Simulation Criteria screen, simply alter the return period from one
year to 30 years and the MADD factor to 1. Your finished data should look as
follows:
Example 7
Page 7.5
The Water UK/WRc plc specification Sewers for Adoption 6th Edition states
that the system should be designed under pipe full conditions for 1, 2 or 5
years and designed not to flood any part of the Site for a 1:30 year return
period design storm. In addition, local planning conditions or other
approving authorities may require a more extreme standard such as the 100
year return period plus an allowance for climate change.
With the above conditions a MADD factor of 2 would not be unreasonable
but the Water Company may use their discretion to request a lower value or
0. For more information select the Help facility within Simulation Criteria.
Surcharged Outfall
Select Outfall Details from the Network menu and the following window
appears:
This facility allows you to edit the outfall details and model a tidal outfall. If
the water rises above the invert of the outgoing pipe there will be a backing
effect in the drainage system. You are able to vary the rising water level
minute by minute to model this effect in Micro Drainage. This is also useful
if the network outfalls into a pond where the top water level is higher than the
network's outfall.
Page 7.6
Example 7
The model assumes that a flap valve has been placed on the outfall to prevent
the water flowing back into the system. This example has a free outfall so
simply click Cancel and click OK on the Simulation Criteria.
Analyse
We are now ready to analyse the flows through the network. Click the
Analyse menu. The following options appear:
You are given four choices of time interval for the analysis. While the storm
is actually only 30 minutes long, the analysis is for 60 minutes to observe the
system draining down. To run the analysis for longer, specify a Run Time in
the Simulation Criteria, for this example accept the software default.
For a detailed calculation, choose the At Fine time step option either with the
mouse or the keyboard arrows. The Progress window now appears, followed
by the Save New Data dialogue box.
Click the Save option. Simulation automatically presents you with the
Summary of Results spreadsheet. Use the scroll bar below the data to view
the Status field if it is not shown.
Example 7
Page 7.7
Whilst the network shows no flooding the pipe flow from 1.004 is 206 l/s, far
more than the 50 l/s maximum allowed.
Online Controls
A flow control can be introduced to pipe 1.004 to limit the discharge from the
network. To do this simply select the Online Controls option from the
Network menu.
Online Controls
The Online Controls spreadsheet now appears.
Clear deletes all the specifications for the highlighted control.

Clear All deletes all the specified controls.
Enter 1.004 in the DS Pipe Number. Select control type Pump from the
dropdown list. A constant pump rate is needed, the depth increment can be
user specified. If a Depth and a single Outflow rate are entered the program
will assume the pump requires 200mm to reach the constant flow rate which
it will then maintain up to cover level at that manhole. With this in mind
enter 0.2m and 50 l/s respectively in the first cells.
Alternatively you can select a Depth Increment which will populate the
Depth column on the spreadsheet for you. You may then enter flows for each
depth increment.
Page 7.8
Example 7
When your data are as above, click OK.

As the preferences are set to Maintain Results the analysis is automatically
instigated using the last selected time increment. Alternatively if you have
chosen User from the preferences select the Go toolbar shortcut.
Run Analysis
Example 7
Page 7.9
Summary of Results
In the Summary of Results, the results are colour-coded:
Pipes whose flow capacities are less than 1 are shown in blue.
Pipes whose flow capacities are greater than 1 are shown in red.
Pipes whose flow capacities are greater than 2 are highlighted.
The term flow capacity refers to the ratio of the flow to the full bore capacity
of the pipe.
Note: A test for overloading within System 1 would have shown different
results. Simulation takes account of manhole losses, inlet/outlet controls
and other factors to provide a more accurate representation of the realities
of fluid flow and pipe capacity. For more information on the method of
analysis view the Help.
Simulation applies four levels of status to pipes within a network:
Flood identifies those pipes where the water level is above the upstream
cover level.
Flood Risk is shown when the water level rises to within a prescribed
distance from the cover level - the default freeboard value is 300mm.
Surcharged pipes are those where the water level is above the soffit at the
upstream end of the pipe.
OK designates a pipe where the water is at or below the soffit at the
upstream end.
Analysis of Results
In this example, although pipe 1.001 is surcharged, it is not overloaded (the

flow capacity is less than 1 and is shown in blue). It is only shown as
surcharged because its downstream pipe (1.002) is overloaded and backs-up
into 1.001.
Page 7.10
Example 7
Pipe 1.003 has surcharged to within 300mm of the cover level and is
therefore shown as Flood Risk. Pipe 1.004 has flooded because of the
restriction placed on it by the pump rate.
Graphs
To view graphs, simply click on the Graphs icon in the toolbar.

Graphs
Simulation presents you with graphic analysis for each pipe in turn.
To view each pipe, use the Select Pipe drop down at the top of the screen.
You are also able to choose whether to view Branch Lines, Selection Set,
Flow Graph, Velocity Graph, Volume Graph, Depth Graph, Rainfall Curve
on Flow Graph, Overflow Curve on Flow Graph and Infiltration Curve on
Flow Graph using the buttons on the Toolbar.
Example 7
Page 7.11
Longsections, animate
Next, click on the Longsections icon in the toolbar.

Longsections
Simulation presents the longsection of the network. You can move along the
network using the scroll bar as usual, adjusting your view by choosing the
number of pipes displayed.
For the best view of the animation facility, enlarge the screen and scroll to
the end of the network. Set the number of pipes to be displayed to 5 and the
length of line 1 will be presented.
The red line indicates the highest water level during the storm and it is
already apparent that flooding occurs at the upstream end of 1.004.
Page 7.12
Example 7
Animation
Within Simulation, the Video Controls form appears when a graphics form
that can be animated is opened, it is available from the Results menu if it has
been closed. As with Source Control these function in the same way as a
standard media player:
Here again the animated red line indicates the flow and you can use the Trace
button to view a time-elapsed image.
Schematic
Call up the Schematic from the Graphics menu and run the animation to view
the progress of the storm. Clicking Show Flow Direction indicates the flow
with a dotted line and direction pointer.
Note that at the peak of the flow - around 20-40 minutes into the 30 minute
storm - surcharged pipes and manholes are shown with red circles around the
manholes. Flooded parts of the system show in blue with the animation
showing how the manhole fills and floods during the storm.
Example 7
Page 7.13
Windows management within Simulation
You can have the results analysis facilities open simultaneously. As with
System 1, you can arrange them for easy switching between windows by
using the Cascade option under the Window menu. You can also switch
between windows using the icons in the toolbar.
Utilising existing storage
Move the Longsection so that pipes 2.000 and 2.001 are displayed. The red
maximum water line clearly shows pipe 2.000 does not fill. We are now
going to try to control the outflow from pipe 2.000 to use more of its storage.
We will assign a 150mm orifice control on pipe 2.000. However, instead of

entering the data in the usual way we can demonstrate the use of Toolbox in
the Schematic View (also available in the Plan View) as a means of
introducing controls.
Page 7.14
Example 7
Using the Schematic to introduce controls
Click on the Schematic icon to open the Schematic view. You will see that as
branch line 2 was being displayed on the Longsection the Schematic will
automatically go to the same branch. Select the Toolbox icon.
Toolbox
Make sure the Online Controls tab is selected. There is a collection of icons
representing online controls. Moving the pointer over each control causes the
name of the control to be displayed. In each case the final icon is used to
cancel any given control.
For this example we require control Orifice, which is the top left of the OnLine icons:
Orifice
Click on this and drag it over the manhole at the outflow of 2.000 as shown
below. See also the How-Do-I: Specify a Hydro-Brake for more information
on dragging and dropping controls.
Example 7
Page 7.15
When you release the mouse button, the Online Controls dialogue box
appears.
Enter the diameter of 150mm (0.150m) and click OK; the Schematic shows
that a control is now present.
As Maintain Results is selected in the File Preferences the analysis is
automatically run after every edit made to your network. Open the
Longsection and once the Maintain Results has finished you can see that the
storage in pipe 2.000 has now been fully utilised. On faster PCs this will be
almost instantaneous. The next step is to try to alleviate flooding at the pump
location.
Page 7.16
Example 7
More analysis
You will notice that orifice controls on the tank sewers raise the water levels
in the tanks, making better use of their storage and reducing downstream
flows even further. Pipe 2.000 is controlled by a combination of the
downstream orifice and the rising water level in pipe 2.001.
In other words, Micro Drainage can analyse controls drowned by rising water
levels downstream. (To examine the tank sewer 2.000 on the graphs you must
examine pipe 2.000 and also the control pipe 2.001, as its upstream manhole
determines the level. Pipe 2.000 itself may show no surcharging which only
means that the water level is not above the upstream soffit of pipe 2.000).
As Simulation analyses backwater effects in all pipes including those without
controls. The downstream pipe, together with rising water levels in the
downstream system dictates the water level in the pipes.
The downstream pipe in cases without controls should be relatively long;
otherwise small changes in water levels will result in very large changes in
hydraulic gradient and/or capacities.
For these obvious reasons large short pipes are not suitable for analysis
without controls. If you are in any doubt, inspect the results and in particular
if the unstable analysis warning appears on your results. If there are rapid and
repeated changes in the outflow graph run the analysis At 2.5 Second
Increment (Extended) by selecting it from the Analyse menu. Also refer to
Unstable Analysis in the on-line Help.
Micro Drainage also provides for a large range of online control
configurations to be used at invert levels above the control.
Example 7
Page 7.17
Overflows
Next introduce an offline control in the form of a side weir in the upstream
manhole of pipe 1.004. This provides an overflow for the pumping station to
maintain a water depth of around 1.6m. To do this, call up the Offline
Controls form by selecting Offline Controls from the Network menu. Offline
Controls can also be added in the same way as Online Controls on the Plan or
Schematic.
Offline Controls
In the first cell key in pipe number 1.004 and call up the control type options
as described above. Choose option Weir. When the Control Details box
appears, enter the values as shown, using tab or the mouse to move between
the boxes. Then click OK and wait for the analysis to update. The flow over
the weir is shown in the Overflow (l/s) column of the Summary of Results.
Page 7.18
Example 7
Storage
It is not always possible to discharge water from the network in this manner.
We will therefore add storage at the pump to stop the overflow activating.
Before designing the storage we need to find out how much is required. To
do this select the Preferences button on the Summary of Results toolbar. Tick
the Overflow Vol (m) option, click Apply and then OK.
The Summary of Results now displays an Overflow Vol (m) column, which
shows 48.139 m goes over the weir. There is 1.6m of usable depth below the
overflow in manhole 8. This equates to a fixed rate pond area of about 35m.
To add the pond select Pond (Tank/Storage Structure) from the Network
menu and enter the details as shown below.
Specifying 35.0 in the Area (m) column will result in a straight sided pond
starting at the manhole invert and rising up to the cover level. Click OK. Wait
for the Summary of Results to be automatically updated.
Example 7
Page 7.19
The results show that the flooding has been cured.

Note: This is a simple case with a constant pumped flow. Source Control
may be used to estimate the storage requirement in more complex
examples. Also CASDeF can size storage for all storms in a few seconds.
Controls (loops)
Finally, we will introduce a loop into the system. Open the Offline Controls
spreadsheet again and enter pipe number 2.001 in the second row. Select
control type Pipe and Loop to Pipe Number 3.000. Enter the data as shown,
click OK and run the analysis.
Analysis
Look at the graphs for pipes 2.001 and 3.000. You will see that the loop
control pipe takes a distinct "chunk" of water from pipe 2.001 and lets it flow
through 3.000. The water only flows through the looped pipe control when
the upstream manhole of 2.001 has a water depth of 0.6m above the outgoing
pipe invert.
Page 7.20
Example 7
Printing
To print your results, click on the Print icon in the toolbar. The Simulation
Print gives you a range of options:
For this final analysis select the Network Details, Simulation Criteria,
Storage Structures, Online Controls and Offline Controls from the Model tab.
From the Results tab select Summary of Results and Rainfall Profile and then
select the Update Preview button.
The selected information will now be displayed. Select the Print button to
print or alternatively select Save to create an electronic copy.
Example 7
Page 7.21
APT Flood Flow & Climate Change
If this is the system you want you should also check it for all storm durations.
If you have very small controls then very long storms may be critical. If you
have APT the wizards may be used to automatically summarise the results of
all Summer and Winter storms. It is also necessary under some specifications
to determine flood flow paths and the sensitivity to climate change and these
facilities are described in Example 8.
Measured Rainfall and measured flows
If you choose Rainfall Profile in the Simulation Criteria, you will be allowed
to specify up to ten hyetographs. In this instance you may use soil index and
PIMP data in lieu of Cv (the volumetric run-off coefficient).
You can then specify a different hyetograph for each pipe by entering the
hyetograph number in the Profile Number column of Rainfall Links which
can be accessed in the Network menu. You can re-run the above example
with Rainfall Profile selected in the Simulation Criteria. You have the option
to create, edit and load synthetic hyetograph and/or real world rainfall data
which the program will use for analysis.
Measured hydrographs may also be input into the system. This feature is also
used to connect upstream networks into the system. If a sub-catchment has
not been analysed it may be represented as a time/area diagram, as can an
undeveloped catchment which may need to be incorporated to determine its
effect on the network.
If you have APT the Unit Hydrograph method may be used to generate flows
from undeveloped land.
Page 7.22
Example 7
Points to remember
Probably the most common mistake to make with Simulation is to run a

hopeless case. A system that cannot take a 5 year storm will not yield
meaningful results when simulated on a 100 year return period. Some
preliminary work is required.
The first step is to run option 1 of the overloaded options contained in System
1 for say a 1 year return. This will yield the diameters the pipes should have
been under normal design conditions. If a 150mm pipe should have been a
600mm pipe then there is precious little point in simulating it under extreme
conditions - it will flood!
If the capacity of the pipe is very small then storage may not be the most
economical solution. The pipe may have to be upgraded.
The program will endeavour to analyse anything you specify but only if your
approach is sensible will the results be meaningful.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example7.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 23
Example 7
Simulation of a drainage
system with tank sewers
Checked by
Network 2014.0 (Beta 2)
Existing Network Details for Example7
PN

k
HYD DIA
(m)
(m) (1:X) (ha) (mins) (mm) SECT (mm)
1.000 20.000 1.200

1.001 39.000 0.488
PN
16.7
79.9
0.200
0.120
5.00 0.600
0.00 0.600
o
o
225
300
2.000 80.000 0.360 222.2

2.001 25.000 0.888 28.2
0.200
0.120
5.00 0.600
0.00 0.600
o
o
600
225
1.002 90.000 0.360 250.0

1.003 50.000 0.350 142.9
0.115
0.350
0.00 0.600
0.00 0.600
o
o
375
375
3.000 90.000 0.480 187.5
0.000
5.00 0.600
750
1.004 45.000 0.300 150.0 0.070

0.00 0.600
o
DS/CL
DS/IL
DS
US/MH US/CL
US/IL
US
(m)
(m)
C.Depth
Name
(m)
(m)
C.Depth
(m)
(m)
375
Ctrl
US/MH
(mm)
1.000
1.001
1 102.000 100.500
2 101.000 99.225
1.275 101.000 99.300

1.475 100.600 98.737
1.475
1.563
1050
1050
2.000
2.001
3 101.900 100.060
4 101.700 99.700
1.240 101.700 99.700

1.775 100.600 98.812
1.400
1.563 Orifice
1500
1500
1.002
1.003
5 100.600
6 100.150
98.662
98.302
1.563 100.150 98.302

1.473 99.600 97.952
1.473
1.273
1350
1350
3.000
7 100.400
97.950
1.700
99.600 97.470
1.380
1800
1.004
97.470
1.755
98.800 97.170
1.255
99.600
Pump
1800
Free Flowing Outfall Details for Example7

D,L
W
Outfall
Min
Pipe Number
Name
(m)
(m)
I. Level (mm) (mm)
(m)
1.004
98.800
97.170
0.000 1800
Simulation Criteria for Example7

Volumetric Runoff Coeff 0.750
Foul Sewage per hectare (l/s) 0.000
Areal Reduction Factor 1.000 Additional Flow - % of Total Flow 0.000
Hot Start (mins)
0
MADD Factor * 10m/ha Storage 1.000
Hot Start Level (mm)
0
Run Time (mins)
60
Manhole Headloss Coeff (Global) 0.500
Output Interval (mins)
1
Number of Input Hydrographs 0
Number of Offline Controls 2 Number of Time/Area Diagrams 0
Number of Online Controls 2 Number of Storage Structures 1
Synthetic Rainfall Details
Rainfall Model
FSR
Profile Type Summer
30
Cv (Summer) 0.750
Region England and Wales
Cv (Winter) 0.840
M5-60 (mm)
20.000 Storm Duration (mins)
30
Ratio R
0.400
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example7.mdx
XP Solutions
Example 7
Checked by
Online Controls for Example7
Orifice Manhole: 4, DS/PN: 2.001, Volume (m): 25.7
Diameter (m) 0.150 Discharge Coefficient 0.600 Invert Level (m) 99.700
Pump Manhole: 8, DS/PN: 1.004, Volume (m): 49.7
Depth (m) Flow (l/s)
0.200
50.0000
Page 24
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example7.mdx
XP Solutions
Example 7
Checked by
Offline Controls for Example7
Pipe Manhole: 4, DS/PN: 2.001, Loop to PN: 3.000
Diameter (m)
0.225
Roughness k (mm)
0.600
Section Type Pipe/Conduit
Entry Loss Coefficient
0.900
Slope (1:X)
50.0 Coefficient of Contraction
0.600
Length (m)
50.000 Upstream Invert Level (m) 100.300
Weir Manhole: 8, DS/PN: 1.004, Loop to PN: None
Page 25
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example7.mdx
XP Solutions
Example 7
Checked by
Storage Structures for Example7
Tank or Pond Manhole: 8, DS/PN: 1.004
Depth (m) Area (m)
0.000
35.0
Page 26
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example7.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 27
Example 7
Checked by
Summary of Results for 30 minute 30 year Summer (Example7)
Margin for Flood Risk Warning (mm) 300.0
DVD Status OFF
Analysis Timestep Fine Inertia Status OFF
DTS Status
ON
PN
1.000
1.001
2.000
2.001
1.002
1.003
3.000
1.004
US/MH
Name
Water
Level
(m)
1 100.613
2 99.740
3 100.409
4 100.396
5 99.499
6 99.152
7 99.106
8 99.106
Pipe
Surcharged Flooded
Volume Flow / Overflow Flow
Depth
(l/s)
(m)
Cap.
(l/s)
(m)
-0.112
0.215
-0.251
0.471
0.462
0.475
0.406
1.261
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.51
0.77
0.13
0.41
1.15
1.36
0.02
0.33
Status
0.0 58.8
OK
0.0 89.4 SURCHARGED
0.0 54.8
OK
21.5 36.9 SURCHARGED
0.0 14.4 SURCHARGED
4.2 50.0 SURCHARGED
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 02/01/2014
File Example7.mdx
XP Solutions
Example 7
Checked by
Graphs for Pipe 1.004 US/MH 8 (Example7)
30 minute 30 year Summer
Status: SURCHARGED
Page 28
Example 8
Page 8.1

Example 8 - Simulation
Advanced Productivity Tools & CASDeF
Page 8.2
Example 8
Introduction
This example demonstrates the enhanced functionality of A.P.T. and

CASDeF to improve the design and productivity of a typical drainage
network.
The developed site is expected to increase the volume of discharge above the
original greenfield runoff. Therefore the allowable discharge has been limited
to QBAR (20 l/s) for the 100 year event.
The determination of QBAR and the pre-development runoff volume is
discussed in Appendix v.
The completed design must comply with Sewers For Adoption (no flooding
for a 1:30 year return period, minimum velocities, manhole sizes etc.). A
pond at the outfall will be designed for the 100 year event while discharging
no more than 20 l/s.
Finally, the system will be audited against increased rainfall to determine
sensitivity to failure under climate change. Also any on-site flooding that
occurs during this extreme event must be contained on the site and the
overland flood flow paths identified to ensure the safety of buildings.
The example follows the current requirements of ICP SUDS, SFA, CfSH and
NPPF. However the specification for each site must be approved by the
relevant statutory authorities. Other specifications and criteria may be
supported using a similar methodology, for example the Code for Sustainable
Homes requirements under Category 4: Surface Water Runoff, SUR 1 are
based on the ICP for SUDS and therefore the same audit can be used. Risks
to pedestrians and vehicles from flood flow may also be determined but is
covered in example 14 in more detail.
Example 8
Page 8.3
The network
The following network will be tested:
We have the opportunity of placing some of the storage mid site in pipe
1.002. This pipe has been enlarged to 1200mm. We will assess the system to
see if it is being utilised and, if not, we will design a control to make the best
use of the storage available. As we have to limit the discharge to 20 l/s we
will add a control at the upstream end of 1.007.
This design was set out using System1 and DrawNet. So far no simulation
checks have been carried out to find whether it passes the current design
specifications and good engineering practice. Before APT was available,
checks were carried out by inspection, running each storm duration
individually and analysing the huge amount of data generated by the network.
Processing the storms individually did not take a long time, but analysing the
data and finding the critical storm for the network was very time consuming,
especially if attenuation was incorporated into the design (which is the norm
in sustainable design).
APT (Advanced Productivity Tools) takes the laborious and time consuming
data collation and analysis out of the equation.
APT and CASDeF automate through a range of Wizards to analyse the
system and alter it automatically. Approximately one thousand simulations
will have been run via all the Wizards when this example has been
completed.
Page 8.4
Example 8
Loading the Software
Open Network using your preferred method. At the Open screen, select Open
Existing File.
Go to the \Micro Drainage 2014\Data directory and Example8.mdx should
feature on the list of files, enabling you to open the file simply by double
clicking (please ensure it is the latest file supplied with the software). If it is
not displayed, it can be found on the installation DVD supplied.
Overview of the Network
We will start with a Seasonal Return Period Wizard. This Wizard will
provide a full overview of the system for all storm durations, both Summer
and Winter and it will also identify the critical storm for each node
automatically.
Select Seasonal Return Period Wizard from the Wizards menu.
The Wizard will take you through a series of storyboards allowing sequential
data entry. Step 1 sets the rainfall criteria for the site. Simulation will
automatically read the rainfall data specified in the storm design.
Note that the wizard allows you to run both Summer and Winter storms.
Winter storms are very important especially when checking attenuation
designs. You should also check that the Volumetric Runoff Coefficient is at
least 0.84 for winter storms. The program gives standard defaults, but these
can be changed to suit different site conditions (please refer to Help for more
information).
Summer and Winter storms should be run for this design so make sure they
are both selected and click Next to proceed to Step 2. Specify the standard
storm durations by clicking the Default button and then Next.
Example 8
Page 8.5
Step 3 allows you to enter the Return periods. Enter the return periods as
below and click Next.
At Step 4 the Fine (recommended) time step is chosen with Dynamic Time
Step on. Click Finish.
Page 8.6
Example 8
The program starts running all nine design storms for both Summer and
Winter profiles, with six different Return Periods. Thats a total of 108
simulations.
When all the runs have been completed click Save and the Summary Wizard
Results along with a Storm Selector floating window will be presented. To
examine the results in full we need to add a couple of fields to the Summary
table.
Select Summary Preferences from the toolbar. Select Event and Storm Rank,
click Apply and then OK.
Use the Storm Selector to view the results of all the simulation runs for
different return periods and storm durations.
From the Summary of Results we are interested in finding the critical storm
for each node. We can do this by sorting through all 108 storms individually
or we can simply click the Critical Storm icon, which will sift through all the
data and find the worst case for every pipe based on the Maximum Water
Level.
Critical Storm
The summary table will now show the results below.
Example 8
Page 8.7
There is no flooding in the system for a 30 year return period but in the
absence of controls the Network is discharging at 823.2 l/s. Also note the 15
minute Winter Storm is critical for every pipe.
Tip: If the network becomes unstable, re-run the Wizard and at Step 4
select the 2.5 second increment (extended) (slowest analysis). This will
run the longer storm durations at a shorter time step. For cases where the
Summary shows flooding but the water level is below the cover level you
may see an unstable analysis warning to help warn you when an extended
time step may be needed.
Click back onto the Current Storm icon and from the Storm Selector, select
the 15 minute Winter storm for the 30 year return period.
Current Storm
Storm Selector window
Bring up the 3D WorldView either from the Graphics menu or be selecting

the icon from Plan view.
3D World View
The program will generate a full 3-Dimensional representation of the
network. Click on the compass to the left to move around the network and
zoom into areas. (See Example 3 for more information on how to use all the
controls in the 3D view and also see Help).
Page 8.8
Example 8
The Video Controls form appears allowing animation of the water levels in
the pipes and manholes throughout the storm. The Storm Selector should
already be open displaying the 15 minute winter storm for the 30 year return
period. If it is not visible you can select it from the Results menu and change
it to show the above information.
Use the compass to get pipe 1.002 fully in view and press the Play button on
the Video Controls. Notice how the pipe storage is not fully utilised for the
critical storm.
Example 8
Page 8.9
CASDeF
CASDeF provides solutions to hydraulic problems in the sewer system.

Normally CASDeF is used to solve flooding problems, but it has a wider
range of application.
Instead of the Engineer providing individual solutions through trial and error,
CASDeF will provide the solutions automatically and, more importantly,
quickly.
The CASDeF Controller gives the Engineer complete control over the design
and analysis processes. Any or all options may be switched off at each node
to prevent CASDeF from defining impractical solutions.
A full Audit Trail is provided enabling the Engineer to trace the decisions
made by CASDeF.
To solve individual problems, CASDeF will use a logical 3 step procedure.
Step 1 Introduction and sizing of controls to utilise existing storage
Step 2 Upgrading of pipe sizes where there is insufficient flow capacity
Step 3 Introduction of Storage
In this example we are going to use CASDeF to design a hydraulic control at
the downstream end of our large tank sewer (Pipe 1.002). This will attenuate
the flow in Pipe 1.002 to utilise all the available storage.
Select Network Manager from the Site menu. We want to save the file before
running CASDeF but as yet we do not know if this will be our final solution.
You could save a revision at each change in a separate file. Alternatively, you
are able to Copy the network and save revisions or scenarios in the same file
using the Network Manager functions.
Highlight Example8 and click the Copy icon in the toolbar. Rename the Copy
as Example8A. To stop CASDeF making changes to the starting network you
can turn off analysis for Example8 by clicking the Go icon so it turns red,
also turn off the Select, Move and Visible options. The Network Manager
should now look like this:
Page 8.10
Example 8
Now select CASDeF Parameters from the Site menu.
The CASDeF Parameters allow the range of design storms to be set. You can
also set design parameters such as minimum control sizes and standard pipe
increments when upsizing pipes.
Set the data as above and click OK.
Example 8
Page 8.11
Open the Network menu and select CASDeF Controller.

Switch on the Modify Control setting for pipe 1.003 and click OK. The
control upstream of pipe 1.003 will control the water levels in pipe 1.002.
To start the CASDeF run select CASDeF + Summary Wizard from the
Wizards menu. CASDeF will now design the control to fully utilise the
storage capacity of the pipe. Then it will construct a summary wizard on the
design for a full validation.
Again step through the Wizard selecting Summer and Winter storms and the
default storm durations as before and at the end of the wizard click Finish to
commence the CASDeF run. If a warning appears select No and CASDeF
will only be run on the current network
When the Wizard has finished running, the summary of results will be
displayed. Click the Critical Storm icon in the toolbar to observe the impact
of the CASDeF alterations.
Page 8.12
Example 8
Note that CASDeF has lowered the final discharge rate to 777.0 l/s, without
introducing any flooding. We must view the Audit Trail to examine the
changes made by CASDeF.
Under the Results menu in the main toolbar, select CASDeF Audit Trail.
The Audit Trail saves all the decision-making processes CASDeF used whilst
solving the problem.
Use the scroll bar at the side of the table to view the CASDeF alterations.
The grand summary is at the end of the file. CASDeF has designed a 268mm
orifice plate to make full use of the storage in Pipe 1.002.
The effect of the orifice is clearly illustrated on the 3D view. First change the
Storm Selector to view the 30 minute Winter storm. Now click on the Plan
view and click the 3D button or open the 3D from the Graphics menu.
We have used CASDeF so far to design hydraulic controls in the system and
make use of the storage capacity. This is just a small sample of its power.
Example 8
Page 8.13
We are now going to change the specification quite dramatically. The

network is currently discharging with no restrictions on the outfall. However
most sites will have some form of restricted discharge.
The final discharge through Pipe 1.007 is to be restricted to 20 l/s for the 100
year return period. A storage pond at the outfall must be designed to store the
100 year event (ICP SUDS). From the previous wizard we know that the
current discharge rate for the worst case storm is 777.0 l/s. It is quite obvious
that if we cut the flow down to such a small rate flooding will occur.
Normally we would set a control to achieve our desired discharge rate and
run all the design storms to find the extent of the flooding, if any. We would
then proceed to design the storage structure and re run all the design storms
again to prove that the system meets the new criteria.
We will set the control and solve the flooding in one operation,
demonstrating another part of CASDeF.
Before setting the control make another copy of the network called
Example8B following the same procedure as on page 8.10 but this time copy
then switch off Example8A.
Page 8.14
Example 8
Select Simulation Criteria from the Site menu and change the Return Period
(years) to 100, Storm Duration (mins) to 30 and Profile to Winter.
Then open the Online Controls and specify a Hydro-Brake at Pipe 1.007.
Click the Calculator button and set the Design Head to 2m and the
Design Flow to 20 l/s.
Select an MD 6 from the list. This Hydro-Brake type is not pre-initialised in
this case and it also has a good opening size of 157mm.
Example 8
Page 8.15
We must change the CASDeF Controller to set up the new specification

before we carry out the CASDeF run.
Click on the Network menu in the toolbar and select the CASDeF Controller.
Edit the CASDeF Controller to allow storage to be added at the HydroBrake location by ticking the Add Storage box for pipe 1.007 and set the
Level Not Exceed to 98.037 (2m deep).
Remember to deselect Modify Control for Pipe 1.003, as it will still be

selected from the last run.
Click OK.
Page 8.16
Example 8
We are now ready to run CASDeF again. Select CASDeF + Summary

Wizard from the Wizards menu. Set the Return Period (years) to 100 and go
through the steps as before.
CASDeF will analyse several passes to design a storage pond to alleviate the
flooding.
Select CASDeF Audit Trail from the Results menu and peruse the changes
made by CASDeF.
The audit trail documents that CASDeF has added 2022m of storage at the
upstream end of Pipe 1.007 in the form of a pond.
Close the audit trail and open the Summary of Results to examine the effect
of adding the pond.
Notice that there are now three storms, which are critical in the network.
Example 8
Page 8.17
The critical summary confirms that the discharge has been reduced to 17.8 l/s
(below the 20 l/s target). However on inspection the Summary shows that the
water level at the pond location is 1.592m (992mm surcharged depth on pipe
1.007 plus a 600mm pipe). This is below our required water depth of 2m for
the pond which is acceptable but you may wish to adjust it.
Before continuing add a copy of the network called Example8C as on page
8.10 remembering to turn off the other networks.
To increase the water level we will reduce the size of the pond manually by
20% (0.4m/2m).
Select Pond (Tank/Storage Structure) from the Network menu.
Enter -20 in the Scale Factor box and click the Scale button. Then click OK
to accept the new pond size.
As we have used CASDeF to make the Engineering decisions for us and

changed the system, we still need to check the design to verify that it still
complies with good engineering practice in accordance with Sewers For
Adoption 7th Edition. Additional calculations to confirm compliance with the
Interim Code of Practice have also been included.
Page 8.18
Example 8
Click on the Wizards menu in the main toolbar and from the pull down select
Design Audit Wizard.
The Design Audit Wizard will appear.
This allows you to specify up to 10 tests, ranging from Pipe Diameters to Full
Bore Velocities.
Confirm that the variables are set out as above and click Next to proceed to
Step 2. Make sure both the Summer and Winter storms are selected.
Step 3 allows you to specify the storm durations. We are going to run the
standard storm durations so click the Default button and then Next.
Example 8
Page 8.19
Step 4 allows you to set different return periods for the different design
checks. Three more audits are also available here, Surcharge, Flooding and
P. Velocity. Tick all boxes and accept the default return periods. Set the
Minimum Proportional Velocity (m/s) to 0.75 and select Next.
At Step 5 tick Use ICP SUDS to turn on the 14th and final audit which tests
the allowable discharges for the network against the ICP SUDS specification.
Page 8.20
Example 8
Refer to Appendix v for a worked example on calculating the allowable

discharge rates.
If required the return periods and climate change allowances can be specified
as will be required for the Code for Sustainable Homes criteria. For this
example, accept the defaults.
It is also necessary to determine the volume of runoff from the undeveloped
site during an event of 360 minute duration and 100 year return period (based
on the current ICP SUDS specifications).
Enter the discharge rates as shown and click the Calculate button. Enter the
ICP Greenfield Runoff values as shown below and click Calculate.
Example 8
Page 8.21
The undeveloped catchment discharges a volume of 1696m3 for a 360 minute

100 year return period event. If this volume discharge is exceeded for the
same storm on the developed site then 20.1 l/s will be the maximum
allowable discharge for both the 30 and 100 year events.
Click OK to apply the results of the Calculator and then proceed to the end of
the Wizard. Click Finish to run the Auditor.
When completed the Wizard presents its findings. The Summary report lists a
total of five failures across seven pipes. The system has failed on cover
levels, velocities, proportional velocities, headlosses and the ICP check.
Click the Pipes option to see where the failures have occurred.
X markers indicate that pipe 1.002 has failed on cover, velocity and
proportional velocity. Pipe 2.001 has failed on velocity. Pipe 1.007 has failed
on proportional velocity and the ICP audit and pipes 1.003 to 1.006 have
failed on manhole headlosses.
We will now examine the failures in more detail by looking at them
individually. Click the Cover Levels option on the left hand side.
Page 8.22
Example 8
Pipe 1.002 does not have the required 1.2m cover at its downstream end. This
pipe was originally oversized for the storage and again this failure can be
accepted if the structural strength and pipe surround are specified
appropriately.
The next set of failures is listed under Full Bore Velocity. Click the Full Bore
Velocity option to display the following data.
Then click on the Proportional Velocity option as this is the next failure on
the list.
Pipes 1.002 and 2.001 have not reached the minimum velocity of 1m/s Full
Bore and 1.002 and 1.007 have not reached the specified minimum
Proportional Velocity of 0.75m/s.
It is important for pipes to attain self-cleansing velocities and this particular
failure will need to be addressed. If it is not addressed silting may occur in
the pipe and consequently it may lose some of its storage capacity. Maximum
Velocity may be specified by the sewerage undertaker otherwise it will be
down to the engineers judgement whether this should be corrected or not.
The next set of failures is listed under Manhole Headloss. Click the Manhole
Headloss option to display the following data.
Example 8
Page 8.23
Simulation has applied a global headloss of 0.15 to all the manholes in the
network. As a general rule this value applies to pipes angled at no more than
30 degrees. However, as the network has co-ordinates specified the Auditor
has identified manholes (upstream of 1.003, 1.004, 1.005 and 1.006) where a
higher headloss would be more appropriate due to the change in flow
direction. The recommended headlosses can be applied automatically by
clicking the Update button, however doing this will invalidate the Design
Audit results.
We will return and update the headlosses after reviewing the final category,
ICP Audit.
Developing the site has increased the runoff from the predevelopment
volume of 1696 m3. This confirms that under the ICP SUDS specification the
site should not be allowed to discharge more than QBAR which is 20 l/s. If
the site had passed this test or if the discharge was very low for the 5mm test
then a higher allowable discharge could have been considered.
Page 8.24
Example 8
The Code for Sustainable Homes will require you to show the pre and post
development runoff rates and volume which are presented here, however you
must add an allowance for climate change. In addition the Minimal Discharge
Test may be used to gain extra credits.
To fix the headlosses return to the Manhole Headloss page, click the Update
button and answer Yes to the on-screen prompt. To correct the problems of
low velocities we need to change the physical properties of the pipe.
Create another copy using the Network Manager as before called
Example8D.
Select Existing Network Details from the Network menu.
Increase the fall on Pipes 1.002 and 2.001 by lifting the upstream end of pipe
1.002 by 300mm and by lowering the downstream end of pipe 2.001 by
200mm. This should help the pipes to achieve self-cleansing velocity.
Also the pipe specified for 1.007 only has to convey 20 l/s maximum flow.
Alter the diameter to 300mm.
Example 8
Page 8.25
To view the four updated manhole headlosses select Manhole Headloss from
the Network menu, the updated values appear in red to indicate they have
been changed from the default value specified in the Simulation Criteria.
Close the Manhole Headloss and Network Details windows.

As we have made changes to the network we need to rerun the Design Audit
to determine if the altered system complies with good engineering practice.
Select Design Audit Wizard from the Wizards menu, re-enter the values for
the ICP SUDS step as per page 19 and click the finish button to re-run the
wizard.
When the Wizard has finished select the Pipes option again. The Summary
table indicates the system has still failed on cover for pipe 1.002 and
surcharging for pipe 1.007. This is acceptable as 1.002 is our tank sewer and
has been enlarged to provide storage and 1.007 should surcharge, as it is
where the Hydro-Brake is located.
Page 8.26
Example 8
Pipe 1.007 also fails the ICP Audit for the Volume Balance Test which is
acceptable as QBAR was chosen as the allowable discharge.
However the Summary does not list any failures for full bore velocity,
proportional velocity and manhole headloss. The amendments we made to
the system have resulted in self-cleansing velocities in our pipes and the
network has now passed the set criteria.
In the past, Engineers had to design a system that had no flooding typically
for the 1 in 30 year event. Several specifications and regulations including
Sewers for Adoption 7th Edition now require the Engineer to test the system
beyond failure and identify the flood flow paths.
Below is the relevant extract from Sewers for Adoption 7th Edition.
'In designing the site sewerage and layout, Developers should also
demonstrate flow paths and the potential effects of flooding resulting from
extreme rainfall blockage, pumping station failure or surcharging in
downstream sewers, by checking the ground level around the likely points
that flow would flood from the system to identify the flood routes'.
All of these checks can be carried out in Micro Drainage. APT will execute a
full Sensitivity analysis on the design and it will also indicate the location of
the failures and the sites of possible surface ponding.
Now choose the Climate Change/Sensitivity Wizard from the Wizards menu.
Step through the Wizard to Step 3 adding Default storm durations at Step 2.
Example 8
Page 8.27
The Wizard will increase/decrease the rainfall by the default percentages

shown in Step 3. National Planning Policy Framework (2012) states that
Local planning authorities should adopt proactive strategies to mitigate and
adapt to climate change, taking full account of flood risk in line with the
objectives and provisions of the Climate Change Act 2008, a value of 30% is
commonly applied.
Click Clear all and enter the data as shown below.
Proceed to the end of the wizard and click Finish.

When the Summary of Results appear it may not display the information we
require so select the toolbar Summary Preferences.
Tick the boxes as shown below, click Apply and then OK.
Page 8.28
Example 8
The Summary of Results has now been extended as specified. Click the
Critical Storm icon to identify the critical storm for each pipe.
The First Flooding column displays the event that causes first failure. The
cells with no data have no flooding for any of the increased flows.
Note: This does not mean you can downsize these pipes.
The results indicate three pipes that are the most sensitive points in the
network as they flood with 20% additional flow. However a majority of the
system could withstand the 100 yr rp storm +30% with only minor flooding.
The data from the Sensitivity Wizard can be viewed graphically enabling you
to identify where the system may fail and the possible flood flow paths.
Change the Storm Selector to 15 Winter / +30% sensitivity Flow and bring
up the 3D World View which will display a full 3D representation of the
network and ground profile.
To identify the flooding, the direction of the flood flow and where it finally
ponds select the Flood Path icon from the View Options button menu.
Flood Path
Example 8
Page 8.29
Note that the ground profile has three additional colours:

The Light Blue shading marks the source point of the flooding.
The Yellow Arrows identify the route of the flooding.
The Dark Blue shading locates where the water ponds.
Note: A more detailed analysis of overland flow paths can be generated
using the FloodFlow module. See Example 14 for more details.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 03/01/2014
File Example 8.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 30
Example 8
Simulation
A.P.T. and CASDeF
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Existing Network Details for Example8D
PN

Base
k
HYD DIA
(m)
E1.000 20.000 1.200

E1.001 39.000 0.437
16.7
89.2
0.250
0.250
5.00
0.00
0.0 3.000
0.0 3.000
o
o
225
300
E2.000 25.000 0.625 40.0

E2.001 90.000 0.653 137.8
0.130
0.250
5.00
0.00
0.0 3.000
0.0 3.000
o
o
225
300
E1.002 90.000 0.360 250.0

E1.003 50.000 0.465 107.5
0.240
0.200
0.00
0.00
0.0 3.000
0.0 3.000
o 1200
o 525
E3.000 90.000 2.324
38.7
0.105
5.00
0.0 3.000
150
E4.000 45.000 1.390
32.4
0.136
5.00
0.0 3.000
225
0.458 105.2
0.220 100.0
0.680 50.0
0.222 153.2
0.135
0.951
0.469
0.900
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
o
o
o
o
525
525
525
300
E1.004
E1.005
E1.006
E1.007
48.170
21.990
34.000
34.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000

PN
US/IL
(m)
I.Area
Base
Vel
Cap
(ha)
Flow (l/s) (m/s) (l/s)
E1.000 100.507
E1.001 99.232
0.250
0.500
0.0
0.0
2.51
1.32
99.9
93.1
E2.000
E2.001
99.948
99.248
0.130
0.380
0.0
0.0
1.62
1.06
64.4
74.8
E1.002
E1.003
98.295
97.935
1.120
1.320
0.0
0.0
1.94 2197.6
1.74 376.1
E3.000 100.124
0.105
0.0
1.25
22.0
E4.000
98.860
0.136
0.0
1.80
71.6
E1.004
E1.005
E1.006
E1.007
97.470
97.012
96.792
96.037
1.696
2.647
3.117
4.017
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.76
1.80
2.55
1.00
380.3
390.1
551.9
71.0
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 03/01/2014
File Example 8.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 31
Example 8
Simulation
A.P.T. and CASDeF
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Manhole Schedules for Example8D
MH
Name
MH
CL (m)
MH
Depth
(m)
MH
Connection
MH
Diam.,L*W
(mm)
PN
Pipe Out
Invert
Diameter
Level (m)
(mm)
E1 102.000 1.493 Open Manhole
1200 E1.000
100.507
225
1200 E2.000
99.948
225

E6
1200 E1.001
1500 E2.001
1800 E1.002
1800 E1.003
1200 E4.000

E9
99.232
99.248
PN
300 E1.000
99.307
225
300 E2.000
99.323
225
E2.001
98.595
98.295
1200 E1.001
97.935
525 E1.002
1200 E3.000
100.124
1800 E1.004
97.470
Pipes In
Invert
Diameter Backdrop
Level (m)
(mm)
(mm)
98.795
300
97.935
1200
525 E1.003
97.470
525
E4.000
97.470
150
98.860
300
225
E3.000
97.800
150
225
1500 E1.005
97.012
525 E1.004
97.012
525
E13
1500 E1.007
96.037
300 E1.006
96.112
525
E12
EO/F 1
1500 E1.006
1200
96.792
525 E1.005
OUTFALL
96.792
E1.007
95.815
525
300
Free Flowing Outfall Details for Example8D

D,L
W
Outfall
Min
Pipe Number
Name
(m)
(m)
I. Level (mm) (mm)
(m)
E1.007
EO/F 1
97.750
95.815
0.000 1200
Simulation Criteria for Example8D

Volumetric Runoff Coeff
Areal Reduction Factor
Hot Start (mins)
Manhole Headloss Coeff (Global)
Foul Sewage per hectare (l/s)
0.840
Additional Flow - % of Total Flow
1.000
MADD Factor * 10m/ha Storage
0
Inlet Coeffiecient
0 Flow per Person per Day (l/per/day)
0.150
Run Time (mins)
0.000
Output Interval (mins)
0.000
1.000
0.800
0.000
60
1

Number of Online Controls 2 Number of Storage Structures 1 Number of Real Time Controls 0

Rainfall Model
FSR
Profile Type Winter
100
Cv (Summer) 0.750
Cv (Winter) 0.840
M5-60 (mm)
20.000 Storm Duration (mins)
30
Ratio R
0.400
300
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 03/01/2014
File Example 8.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 32
Example 8
Simulation
A.P.T. and CASDeF
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Online Controls for Example8D
Orifice Manhole: E6, DS/PN: E1.003, Volume (m): 104.5

Diameter (m) 0.268 Discharge Coefficient 0.600 Invert Level (m) 97.935
Hydro-Brake Manhole: E13, DS/PN: E1.007, Volume (m): 11.4

Diameter (mm)
157
0.100
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
5.2
12.0
14.6
14.6
14.1
13.7
0.800
1.000
1.200
1.400
1.600
1.800
13.7
14.5
15.6
16.7
17.8
18.9
2.000
2.200
2.400
2.600
3.000
3.500
19.9
20.9
21.8
22.7
24.4
26.3
4.000
4.500
5.000
5.500
6.000
6.500
28.1
29.8
31.4
33.0
34.4
35.9
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
37.2
38.5
39.8
41.0
42.2
43.3
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 03/01/2014
File Example 8.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 33
Example 8
Simulation
A.P.T. and CASDeF
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Storage Structures for Example8D
Tank or Pond Manhole: E13, DS/PN: E1.007

Depth (m) Area (m)
0.000
924.3
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 03/01/2014
File Example8_cdf_cdf.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 34
Example 8
Simulation
A.P.T. and CASDeF
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Summary of Critical Results by Maximum Level (Rank 1) for Example8D
Simulation Criteria
Areal Reduction Factor 1.000
Additional Flow - % of Total Flow
Hot Start (mins)
0
MADD Factor * 10m/ha Storage
0
Inlet Coeffiecient
Manhole Headloss Coeff (Global) 0.150 Flow per Person per Day (l/per/day)
Foul Sewage per hectare (l/s) 0.000
0.000
1.000
0.800
0.000

Number of Online Controls 2 Number of Storage Structures 1 Number of Real Time Controls 0
Rainfall Model
FSR M5-60 (mm) 20.000 Cv (Summer) 0.750
Ratio R 0.400 Cv (Winter) 0.840
Margin for Flood Risk Warning (mm) 300.0
DVD Status OFF
Analysis Timestep Fine Inertia Status OFF
DTS Status
ON
Profile(s)
Summer and Winter
Duration(s) (mins) 15, 30, 60, 120, 240, 360, 480, 960, 1440
Return Period(s) (years)
1, 30, 100
Climate Change (%)
0, 0, 0
PN
Storm
E1.000 15
E1.001 15
E2.000 15
E2.001 15
E1.002 30
E1.003 30
E3.000 15
E4.000 15
E1.004 15
E1.005 15
E1.006 15
E1.007 480
PN
E1.000
E1.001
E2.000
E2.001
E1.002
E1.003
E3.000
E4.000
E1.004
E1.005
E1.006
E1.007
Return Climate
Period Change
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
US/MH
Name
Water
Level
(m)
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E11
E12
E13
102.001
101.000
101.474
101.004
99.856
99.846
102.501
99.676
98.977
98.856
98.328
97.973
First X
Surcharge
First Y
Flood
0% 30/15 Summer 100/15

0% 30/15 Summer 100/15
0% 30/15 Summer
0% 30/15 Summer 100/15
0% 100/15 Summer
0%
1/15 Winter 100/15
0% 30/15 Summer 100/15
0% 100/15 Summer
0% 30/15 Summer
0% 30/15 Summer
0% 30/15 Summer
0%
1/30 Summer
First Z O/F Lvl

Overflow Act. Exc.
Winter
Winter
1
1
Summer
Summer
Summer
6
2
Pipe
Flooded
Surch'ed Volume Flow / O'flow Flow
(m)
Cap.
(l/s) (l/s)
Depth (m)
1.269
1.468
1.301
1.456
0.361
1.386
2.227
0.591
0.982
1.319
1.011
1.636
0.806
0.199
0.000
3.699
0.000
46.036
1.056
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.93
2.05
0.86
1.64
0.14
0.57
1.29
0.74
0.82
1.59
1.55
0.28
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
91.0
188.4
54.3
121.9
294.1
199.0
28.4
52.4
286.9
528.4
680.3
19.6
Status
FLOOD
FLOOD
SURCHARGED
FLOOD
SURCHARGED
FLOOD
FLOOD
SURCHARGED
SURCHARGED
SURCHARGED
SURCHARGED
SURCHARGED
Example 9
Page 9.1

Example 9 Channel
The Backwater Step Method
Page 9.2
Example 9
Introduction
Channel is a backwater step method for determining the water levels in open
channels. It is suitable for gradually varying flows in channels of reasonably
uniform cross section where the flow is sub-critical.
Where the flow becomes super-critical (or rapid), an estimate of depth based
on stage discharge is output for the main channel. Backwater analysis is then
continued upstream when the flow becomes sub-critical (or tranquil) again.
Methodology
Step methods are one of the most commonly used ways for determining
backwater curves. They calculate the water levels from station to station
where the cross sections and hydraulic characteristics are known.
Some of these methods determine the hydraulic gradient at each station and
average them, while others use the average cross sectional area of the stations
to determine an average velocity and hence a gradient.
Channel uses the latter method, as it is easier to carry out a manual check of
the results. However, there is usually very little difference between the results
given by the two methods.
Preparing the data
The first part of the open channel to be modelled has two reaches, defined by
the three sections shown opposite:
Example 9
Page 9.3
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Page 9.4
Example 9
These sections must be input to the program using x and y co-ordinates. The y
co-ordinates are the levels at each point. The x co-ordinates define the width
of the channel and only need to be given relative to one another.
Defining the sections
Look at the hard copies of the results at the end of this example (pages 9.23
to 9.26), coordinates are defined in x and y format for each section.
Flows and roughness
The roughness variables defined in section 1 apply to the reach from sections
1 to 2. Similarly, the roughness variables defined in section 2 are used
between sections 2 to 3 and so on.
Remember that backwater analysis starts from the outfall, so that section 1 is
downstream of section 2.
The full cross section details for each station are given in the results. This
example has been deliberately chosen for its awkwardness to demonstrate
how complex sections can be modelled.
Opening Channel
After the Channel title screen, you will see the Channel Open screen:
The Start a New Job button is already highlighted, so click OK or press

Return.
Example 9
Page 9.5
Channel Details
Channel presents you with Channel Details spreadsheet. The row for Section
1 under Chainage is already highlighted for you to enter the value. For this
example, enter zero (or leave the field blank) and press Return. The cursor
moves to the Type field, leave this as Open and press Return again to move
to the Flow field, we will come back to different section types later in the
example.
We must enter a flow for the first section and at points where the flow
changes otherwise it will default to the previous value by pressing Return.
Enter 8 m3/s and press Return. Losses may also be varied for each section,
but in this example you need simply to press Return again to reach the Level
column. We must enter a value for the first section, enter 10m. We cannot
edit the level for any other section as the program calculates the level.
Page 9.6
Example 9
Channel Coordinates
Pressing Return in the Level column will have moved the cursor to the first
row of the Channel Coordinates spreadsheet:
Enter the data shown here. Note that the cursor automatically moves between
the x and y coordinates and n value. The n value must be entered for the first
cell and at points where it changes otherwise it will default to the previous
value by pressing Return.
When the cursor moves to the eleventh row, press Return again and it
automatically takes you to Section 2.
Example 9
Page 9.7
Section 2
For Section 2 the chainage is 80, the flows is as for section 1 so will be
automatically filled in if you press Return and there are no losses to enter.
The x/y co-ordinates and n values are as shown.
When you have finished entering these co-ordinates, note that Channel
produces its first results:
Page 9.8
Example 9
Finally, enter the data for Section 3. The chainage is 187.
Longsection
The Longsection and Cross Section are displayed alongside the Channel
Details. To view full screen longitudinal sections of the system, simply click
on the Longsection icon in the toolbar:
Longsection
You can move between sections using the scroll box at the bottom of the
screen; if you click on the scroll box, you can then use the keyboard arrows.
You can also adjust the number of sections displayed using the arrows at the
top of the screen.
Cross sections
To view full screen cross sections of each section, click the Cross Section
icon in the toolbar.
Cross Section
Again, clicking in the scroll bar enables you to switch between sections,
using the keyboard arrows if you prefer.
Example 9
Page 9.9
Cascaded views
As with all Micro Drainage modules, Channel allows you to view all open
windows simultaneously. Simply select Cascade from the Window menu.
You can move quickly between the spreadsheet and the graphic views of the
sections simply by clicking on the window you require.
Printing
You can now print out your results. Simply click on the Print icon in the
toolbar.
Print
When you select Print, Channel shows you the Print dialogue box:
print simply by clicking in the appropriate box. Click the Update Preview
button to see a print preview. When you are satisfied with the selected
options click the Print icon at the top of the dialogue to send the job to the
printer.
Page 9.10
Example 9
Super-critical flow
The usual flow in a river is sub-critical or tranquil. A stone dropped in the

river will cause ripples upstream - the flow is slower than the wave speed.
Super-critical (or rapid) flow has a parallel in supersonic speed. Ripples from
a stone, or a stick placed in the water, will cause waves downstream, but the
velocity is too fast for the wave to travel upstream.
The principles of backwater analysis do not apply if the flow is super-critical,
as downstream effects do not backwater upstream. Accordingly, if the
channel bed is steep and rapid flow results, Channel shows the result in red.
This illustrates that backwater analysis has not been possible and the depth
calculated for that section is based on a stage discharge relationship.
The hard copy places an asterisk beside the result to show it has not been
calculated by backwater. In addition, the results are shown on one line as
they are based on that section and not on the average values of two sections
as in normal backwater.
To view this effect, and to practice the entry of circular sections, we will
enter three additional sections as shown opposite.
Example 9
Page 9.11
Section 4
Section 5
Section 6
Page 9.12
Example 9
Introducing super-critical flow
On the Channel Details spreadsheet move the cursor to Section 4 of the

Chainage Details. Enter a chainage of 200, a flow of 6.000 with the data
shown here for the x/y coordinates and Mannings n.
Section 4, at 200m, provides for super-critical flow, as it is much higher than

the previous section. Note that super-critical flow is shown in red on the
results section of the spreadsheet.
Example 9
Page 9.13
Pipe sections
We shall now add two circular sections. Move the cursor to Section 5 on the
Chainage Details spreadsheet. Enter 230m for the Chainage and then change
the Type to Pipe.
The coordinates form changes to show the appropriate entry form. Click in
the Flow column, then click Return until the cursor appears in the IL column.
Now enter the data shown here for Section 5.
Copying sections
Section 6 has the same diameter and invert level as Section 5 so we can copy
these details by clicking the Insert Section button in the toolbar.
Insert Section
The Insert Section No form appears from which you should select the last
option leaving the change in invert level as 0m, then click OK.
Page 9.14
Example 9
Change the Chainage to 250m and check the other details have been copied
correctly as below.
Note: The results for Section 6 show a return to tranquil flow. Channel
does not model hydraulic jumps, so the water depths for the super-critical
sections must be regarded as estimates for use as data with which to
backwater the next sub-critical section. If a detailed analysis of supercritical flows and hydraulic jumps is required, then these must be
undertaken manually and the appropriate specification applied to stilling
basins etc.
Example 9
Page 9.15
Introducing an intermediate section
The cross-sections in backwater analysis should not change rapidly. Apart

from super-critical flow, another reason the result may appear in red is that
the sections are too dissimilar.
If we introduce an intermediate section between 187m and 200m the
backwater may be successful. To do this, move the cursor back onto Section
3 and click on the Insert Section icon again. Choose Insert Intermediate After
Section No and click OK to accept the insert section position.
Channel inserts a new line below the highlighted Section. The old Section 4
now becomes Section 5. Overtype the Flow value with 6 m3/s for the
intermediate section and update the n values for the Channel Coordinates as
below:
Intermediate sections should always be tried if the results appear in red.

However, if the flow is super-critical then intermediate sections will not alter
the result from red to blue.
Page 9.16
Example 9
Local losses
With the introduction of the intermediate section we still have super-critical

flow at Section 6.
This is because the water levels have dipped due to the large changes in
velocities, even though there is an increase in the energy line upstream. A dip
in water levels may be observed in streamlined sections, but in most
circumstances local losses will occur.
In this example we have a tributary entering the channel between Sections 4
and 3 (194m and 187m), with a flow of 2m3/s. To account for the additional
local losses caused, enter a factor of 1.0 at Section 3. To enter the local loss
factor, simply click in the K field for Section 3 and enter the appropriate
value - in this case, 1.0.
Also the flow exits a culvert into an open channel between Sections 6 and 5
(230m to 200m). If we apply a local loss factor of 1.5 at Section 5, the effect
is duly registered and the results show a more realistic conclusion. The
results now show a much better balance of levels and velocities and, indeed,
a properly accurate reflection of reality:
Note: The super-critical flow at Section 6 has been removed.

Now save the file as Example 9.bckx.
Example 9
Page 9.17
The value of k
To demonstrate the calculations required to determine an appropriate value

for k - the local loss factor - within Channel we will show how it may be
applied to another reach of the channel.
Let us assume that a short culvert restricts the flow in the main channel
between Sections 1 and 2. As the culvert is short (say less than 10m) the
friction loss is negligible and it is not necessary to input section details at
each end of the culvert. A local loss factor input at Section 1 (to be used in
the reach 1 to 2) may be sufficient to account for this obstruction.
The entrance and exit to and from the culvert are abrupt. At the entrance,
50% of the kinetic energy increase from the channel to the culvert is lost,
while at the exit 100% of the kinetic energy decrease from the culvert to the
channel is also lost. This may be expressed as follows:
v1 = average channel velocity
v2 = velocity in culvert
entrance loss = 0.5 * (v22 - v12)/ (2 * 9.81)
exit loss = 1 * (v22 - v12)/ (2 * 9.81)
Total loss = 1.5 * (v22 - v12)/ (2 * 9.81)
The k value in the program is the proportion of the kinetic energy of the
average channel flow lost due to the obstruction. Therefore the k value to be
used in the program is:
k * v12 / (2 * 9.81) = 1.5 * (v22 - v12)/ (2 * 9.81)
If v1 = 1 m/s and v2 = 1.2 m/s, then k = 0.66
This calculation is not applicable if the velocity in the culvert is critical. The
culvert then becomes the control. The critical depth for the culvert must be
calculated and a new backwater curve calculated upstream of the critical
section.
If the culvert were long it would be necessary to specify a section at each end
of the culvert, as friction losses would be significant. Say the culvert starts at
Page 9.18
Example 9
Section 2 and ends at Section 3 and is 150m long. As the x co-ordinates for a
cross section must be at least .001m apart, the vertical sides of a culvert can
only be specified as near vertical (i.e., with a 1 mm slope).
At Section 2 the exit loss from the culvert must be specified as:
k * v22 / (2 * 9.81) = 1 * (v22 - v12)/ (2 * 9.81)
Note that the average velocity for the reach under consideration (between
Sections 2 and 3) is v2 - the velocity in the culvert and k at Section 2 is
deemed to be a proportion of the kinetic energy based on this velocity. v1 is
the average velocity in the channel between Sections 1 and 2.
The entrance loss is now specified at Section 3 and the k factor is calculated
as follows:
k * v12 / (2 * 9.81) = .5 * (v22 - v12)/ (2 * 9.81)
k is now a proportion of v1 which is the average velocity in the channel

between Sections 3 and 4.
So the local loss factor must always be expressed as a proportion of the
average velocity in the reach being considered. If k is specified at Section n it
will be applied to the reach from Section n to Section n+1 and it must be
based on the average velocity in this reach.
It is not possible in this example to give definitive advice on what proportion
of the kinetic energy is lost at each obstruction, as it will always depend on
the geometry of the structure. It is a good starting point to assume that it is a
proportion of the change in the kinetic energy of the flow, as this example
illustrates. However site measurements are very useful in determining local
loss factors.
The ratio of the cross sectional areas of the channel and the obstruction may
change during high flows. An allowance must be made for this if water levels
taken at low flows are used to calculate local loss factors.
Example 9
Page 9.19
Analysing in Simulation A.P.T.
Channel is useful for backwater analysis of river sections with known flows
but if you have additional areas draining to the river sections or you want to
more accurately model super-critical flows the Simulation module can read in
Channel files for analysis.
Start the Simulation A.P.T. module and select Open Existing File at the Open
screen. Change the file type from .mdx, to .bckx using the drop down menu
and open the file Example 9.bckx.
At the Simulation Criteria screen enter the values as shown below:
Click OK to the Simulation Criteria.
Page 9.20
Example 9
Editing the Network Details
Select Network Details from the Network menu. Starting at the most
upstream section, section 7 in the Channel file, the file has been converted to
a network with pipe numbers. The top spreadsheet shows the Pipe DIA for
the open sections from Channel as negative numbers indicating they are from
a conduit library (see Example 2 for details of using your own conduit
library). The conduit library has been created and will be saved as part of the
.mdx file. The circular sections have been loaded as pipes.
Enter the flows from Channel into the Base Flow column; note that these
values are in l/s, rather than m3/s. Enter 6000 l/s for pipe 1.000 and 2000 l/s
at pipe 1.004 where the additional flow enters the network. We will also
enter an extra 5ha at pipe 1.004.
The spreadsheet also shows manholes have not been designed between the
open sections. If the manhole dimensions cannot be seen, open the toolbar
Preferences and turn on the US/MH Diam/Len and US/MH Width columns.
A manhole has been assigned between the open section and the pipe. In
reality this will not exist, to avoid taking into account additional storage
change select the Preferences button and add the US Connection column.
Close the preferences form and change the manhole type to Junction.
The yellow background indicates values have been altered from the original
file.
Example 9
Page 9.21
The local loss factor, K, from Channel can be entered in the Manhole
Headloss form available from the Network menu. Enter the details as shown
below to represent the local losses. The values turn from blue to red to
indicate they are user defined.
Open the Network Manager from the Site menu, Analyse will be set to off,
shown as red. Click on the GO icon and it will change to green, now you can
run the analysis as usual, view the Summary of Results and display the
graphical views. For more information on the Simulation module see
Example 7 of this manual.
Page 9.22
Example 9
Editing in System 1 A.P.T. or DrawNet
Channel files may be imported to System 1 with A.P.T. or DrawNet as

Existing Networks. To import into an existing file, select Network Manager
from the Site menu and click the Import icon on the toolbar, change the file
type to .bckx and select the required file.
To import the network into a new file select Open Existing File at the Open
screen and follow the procedure as for Simulation. For more information on
the DrawNet module see Example 13 of this manual.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 06/01/2014
File Example9.bckx
XP Solutions
Page 23
Example 9
Channel
The backwater step method
Checked by
Channel 2014.1
NOTE:- Slope is the gradient of the energy line not the water line.
The water level is the energy level - V/19.62
CHAIN
(m)
FLOW
AREA
VEL PERIM A/P SLOPE LEVEL
(m/s) (m) (m/s) (m)
(m) (1:X)
(m)
0
0.000 0.035
80
0.000 0.035
187
1.000 0.323
194
0.000 0.393
200
1.500 0.030
230
0.000 0.012
250
8.000
8.000
8.000
8.000
8.000
7.000
6.000
6.000
6.000
6.000
6.000
6.000
6.000
22.66
19.19
15.72
16.23
16.74
13.40
10.07
8.09
6.12
4.61
3.10
3.15
3.21
21.30
0.42 17.80
14.29
0.49 19.48
24.67
0.52 20.04
15.42
0.74 11.65
7.89
1.30 6.24
4.59
1.90 4.63
4.66
10.000
1.08
5074
0.83
2658
0.67
20
0.69
0.74
152
0.68
1171
10.009
10.051
10.397
11.194
11.250
11.280
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 06/01/2014
File Example9.bckx
XP Solutions
Page 24
Example 9
Channel
Checked by
Channel 2014.1
COORDINATES
Section No 1
Chainage (m) 0
Open Channel Coordinates
X (m) Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
1.000 12.000 1.000 12.000 10.000 0.035 23.150 8.230 0.035 38.000 10.300 1.000 42.000 11.200 1.000
5.000 10.500 1.000 19.200 8.110 0.035 34.000 10.200 1.000 40.000 11.000 1.000 44.000 12.000 1.000
Section No 2
Chainage (m) 80
X (m) Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
1.000 12.000 1.000 8.000 10.000 0.035 17.340 8.400 0.035 35.000 10.700 1.000 41.000 11.700 1.000
5.000 10.300 1.000 13.000 8.120 0.035 23.100 10.600 1.000 37.000 11.500 1.000 43.000 12.200 1.000
Section No 3
Chainage (m) 187
X (m) Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
0.000 12.000 0.035 8.600 8.200 0.035 26.000 9.800 1.000

5.000 8.500 0.035 12.000 9.600 1.000 29.000 11.000 1.000
Section No 4
Chainage (m) 194
X (m) Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
0.000 12.500 0.035 6.800 9.135 0.035 17.350 9.940 1.000

5.000 9.285 0.035 10.350 9.840 1.000 20.750 11.850 1.000
Section No 5
Chainage (m) 200
X (m) Y (m)
X (m) Y (m)
X (m) Y (m)
X (m)
Y (m)
0.000 13.000 0.030 5.000 10.070 0.030 8.700 10.080 0.030 12.500 12.700 0.030
Section No 6
Chainage (m) 230
Circular Section Details
Diameter (m) 4.00 Invert Level (m) 10.070 n 0.012
Section No 7
Chainage (m) 250
Circular Section Details
Diameter (m) 4.00 Invert Level (m) 10.070 n 0.012
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 06/01/2014
File Example9.bckx
XP Solutions
Chainage (m)
Page 25
Example 9
Channel
Checked by
Channel 2014.1
0
80
187
194
200
230
Hor Scale 1900

Ver Scale 200
Length (m)
Chainage (m)
107
250
230
Ver Scale 200
14.070
14.070
11.280
10.070
14.070
14.070
Water Level (m)

Invert Level (m)
11.250
10.070
6.000
1.90
1171
L/Bank Level (m)

R/Bank Level (m)
Length (m)
14.070
14.070
12.000
11.000
12.500
13.000
11.850
12.700
80
Hor Scale 1900
Datum (m)6.000
Flow (m/s)
Velocity (m/s)
Slope (1:X)
8.000
6.000 6.000
0.52
0.74 1.30
20 7
152
10.051
8.200
10.397
11.194
9.135
10.070
12.000
12.200
12.000
12.000
Water Level (m)

Invert Level (m)
8.000
0.49
2658
10.009
8.120
L/Bank Level (m)

R/Bank Level (m)
10.000
8.110
8.000
0.42
5074
20
7 6
11.250
10.070
Datum (m)5.000
Flow (m/s)
Velocity (m/s)
Slope (1:X)
30
29.000
11.000
12.000
9.600
26.000
8.600
8.200
9.800
5.000
8.500
Y-Coord (m)
0.000
X-Coord (m)
Page 26
Example 9
Channel
Checked by
Channel 2014.1
12.000
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 06/01/2014
File Example9.bckx
XP Solutions
Hor Scale 500

Ver Scale 150
Datum (m)5.000
Ver Scale 150
Datum (m)6.000
Section Number 4
Chainage (m)
194
Water Level (m) 10.397
17.350
20.750
9.940
10.350
9.840
Hor Scale 500
11.850
5.000
6.800
9.285
9.135
Y-Coord (m)
0.000
X-Coord (m)
12.500
Section Number 3
Chainage (m)
187
Water Level (m) 10.051
Example 10
Page 10.1

Infiltration Systems
Page 10.2
Example 10
Introduction
The use of infiltration techniques has risen to the top of the engineering
agenda. The pressure to improve the environmental impact of the drainage
network led first to a focus on the improvement and, where possible, removal
of combined sewer overflows (CSOs).
Increasingly, however, the emphasis is shifting towards prevention rather
than cure and, ultimately, to solutions that deal with the entire network, from
inflow to outflow. This approach has been dubbed 'Joined-up Thinking'.
Infiltration has a major role to play in this strategy. Source Control is the first
program of its kind to provide a complete analysis and design solution for
engineers, which can integrate infiltration techniques with conventional
design solutions.
Opening Source Control

Open the Source Control module.
Alternatively, use your preferred Windows method. You are presented with
the Source Control Open screen.
This example is based on a 30 hectare site. Approximately 33% of the surface

area is impermeable, with six hectares paved and four hectares roofed. We
have an allowable discharge of 20 l/s.
Example 10
Page 10.3
Within the Source Control Open screen, double click on the Design Guide
icon.
The Design Guide is a tool designed to simplify the complex process of

designing a solution incorporating the use of infiltration techniques. Begin by
clicking the Quick Storage Estimate button.
The Quick Storage Estimate window appears.
Note: Ciria 156 (table 4.6) lists safety factors of between 1.5 and 10.
These refer to a Cv of 1. Increase the safety by a factor of 1.33 to allow
for the Wallingford runoff model.
Page 10.4
Example 10
This process will give us a rough idea of the storage required and show
whether or not infiltration is appropriate as part of the solution.
Enter the variables as shown. To find the Infiltration Coefficient, click the
Calculator button.
The formula is based on the site test from Ciria 156 (Ciria 697) and BRE 365.
Enter the data as shown and click OK. The value 0.2m/hr is entered
automatically.
Click Analyse and the routing calculations are carried out.
Example 10
Page 10.5
We can already see that the use of infiltration is likely to make a substantial
difference to the required storage capacity. Click on the Design tab to see a
graphic representation of the result.
For this example we will route the roofed areas into soakaways and half the
paved area into a porous car park.
Page 10.6
Example 10
The outflows from the soakaways and the car park will be combined with the
remaining paved area run-off, which will feed into a storage pond.
Since the pond is limited by our maximum discharge of 20 l/s, we will design
the soakaways and the car park to maximum discharges of 10 l/s. This is
because the combined discharge from upstream must not exceed the final
discharge rate, otherwise the drain down period may cause the pond to fail.
Note: This is not the only design option. We could, for example, specify
the soakaways with no discharge (infiltration only) and then have 20 litres
per second available for the car park. For a real project, your best
judgement should be applied according to the specific circumstances.
Quick Design
Source Control's Quick Design facility enables us to enter the necessary data
for the design of each solution quickly and easily.
Click OK to close the Quick Storage Estimate window and click the Quick
Design button on the Design Guide and enter the variables for the soakaways
as shown. Most of the values will have been filled in automatically, however
you must alter Area and Discharge.
Example 10
Page 10.7
Click Analyse and the routing calculations for the soakaways are carried out.
The results show that we require between 658 and 782 soakaways of 0.9m
diameter with a 1.35m pit size (1 metre effective depth). To see a section
through the soakaway design, select the Structures tab.
Page 10.8
Example 10
Detailed Design
We can now begin to design the soakaway solution in detail. Click OK to

close the Quick Design function and choose Detailed Design in the Design
Guide.
Enter the Global Variables as shown and click OK.
For the Rainfall and Network Details you have only to check the data are as
shown.
Example 10
Page 10.9
Source Control takes the rainfall information from Quick Design

automatically.
Click OK again and the Time Area Diagram spreadsheet opens. Enter the
data as shown and click OK.
At the Lined Soakaway Structure window, enter the data as shown.
Note that we have used an estimate of 720 soakaways, based on the results
from Quick Design. Click OK to continue.
Page 10.10
Example 10
Hydro-Brake
Source Control will calculate the Hydro-Brake automatically. To do this

change the Hydro-Brake Range to Hydro-Brake (foul, combined, SW)
and click the Calculator button.
Calculator
At the Hydro-Brake Calculator enter the data for the Design Head and
Design Flow as below. Choose the Md6 SW Only and click OK.
The Hydro-Brake flow characteristics are calculated for you.
Enter an Invert level of 100m and click OK.
Example 10
Page 10.11
Go with the Flow Check
We are now ready to perform the calculations for the soakaways. Click Go to
run the analysis and the calculations are carried out.
Run Analysis.
Results
When the calculations are complete, save the data as Soakaways.srcx.
The summary shows a maximum depth of 0.988m is reached during the 60

minute winter storm. This is within our available soakaway depth of 1 metre.
This result is satisfactory, but if you needed to edit the size of the soakaways
you can do this via the Edit menu.
Page 10.12
Example 10
Car park
We now move on to design the porous car park, following a similar process
to the one used for the soakaways. Again, select Quick Design from the
Design Guide toolbar and enter the data as shown.
Click Analyse and the results are as follows:
For a car park of 0.4m depth, we require a surface area of between 3694.0m2
and 4054.4m2.
Example 10
Page 10.13
Again, you can view a section by clicking the Structures tab.
Click OK and then click on Detailed Design from the Design Guide which
will start a new job.
This time select Porous Car Park as the storage structure and Orifice for the
outflow control. Enter the rainfall data as before.
Page 10.14
Example 10
For the Time Area Diagram, enter the figures shown to give the total
contributing area of three hectares.
System Details
We will try a square car park with 63m sides, as this gives a surface area of
3969m2 within the range from the Quick Design results.
Enter the figures as shown.
Example 10
Page 10.15
Membrane Percolation is the rate at which water can flow through the geotextile used in the surface of the car park. This, combined with the surface
area of the car park, enables Source Control to calculate a maximum
percolation (inflow) value, shown for reference at the top of the box (4961.3
l/s). Click OK to continue.
Source Control will size the orifice automatically.
Click the Calculator button and enter the required flow details.
Click OK and the value is automatically entered into the analysis.

In this instance we are given an orifice diameter of 89mm. This is too small
and will block easily. Accordingly, we will use a Hydro-Brake instead.
Page 10.16
Example 10
Hydro-Brake
Select Global Variables from the Edit menu and alter the Outflow Control to
Hydro-Brake and click OK.
You are presented with the Hydro-Brake Outflow Control dialogue box.
Change the Hydro-Brake range and enter the data for invert level, design
head and design flow and the remaining values are calculated automatically.
From the pull down menu select Md8 for the Hydro-Brake type. Click OK
and then click the GO button to Analyse.
Example 10
Page 10.17
Results
Save your file as CarPark.srcx.
The results show a maximum depth of 0.394 metres for the 60 minute winter
storm. This is within our designated maximum of 400mm for the car park.
Again, in a real project you may well wish to refine the design, but for the
purposes of this example the results are acceptable. Note also that the HydroBrake we specified has not exceeded the maximum discharge rate of 10 l/s.
Note: Dont worry if your results dont show a status of OK. Flood Risk is
given if the water level is within a specified margin of the cover. This can
be found by selecting Preferences from the File menu. Although it is
always advisable to design using such a safety factor, it is not necessary to
use a value of 300mm (the default) in this case. Since we are designing to
a total depth of 400mm, 200mm is a more practical value to represent the
space needed for the car park construction.
Page 10.18
Example 10
The Pond
The last element of our tripartite approach to storage is the pond itself. In this
instance, the storage required is dependent upon the outflows from the car
park and the soakaways. For this reason we cannot use Quick Design to give
us a starting point. Accordingly, we must go straight to the Detailed Design
tool.
Select the options shown for Global Variables and click OK. The data for the
Rainfall Details and Time Area Diagram are the same as for the car park.
Area
We can calculate the area for the pond using the Quick Storage Estimate
result. This indicated that storage of between 951 m3 and 3009 m3 would be
required if an infiltration system were to be used.
In this case, only two thirds of the storage utilises infiltration, so we can be
sure that the final result will be towards the upper bound given by the
estimate. For this exercise we will assume a figure of 2000 m3.
With just over half of this amount being given by the soakaways and the
carpark we have approximately 900m3 remaining for the pond. If the water
level is not to exceed a depth of 1 metre, the pond area is as shown.
Example 10
Page 10.19
Note: As the Plan Area is constant we only need to enter the first value.
This area will automatically be repeated by the software.
Click OK and enter the data for the Crown Vortex Valve Outflow Control.
You can use the calculator as shown for the Hydro-brake earlier.
Page 10.20
Example 10
Enter the parameters as shown for the overflow weir, which is 1 metre above
the invert of the structure.
Click GO. When the analysis has finished save the file as Pond.srcx. The
results are as shown.
Example 10
Page 10.21
Cascade
At this stage the results are not significant because they do not include the
flow from the car park and the soakaways. To do this, click the Cascade
button on the design tool.
To load the three structures into the Cascade screen, click the Add button.
Add
Double click on each item in turn which will place the icons in the design
area. The icons will be stacked on top of one another. To lay them out as
shown, click on each one in turn with the left mouse button and drag it to the
appropriate place.
To connect the structures, click on the green outflow arrow of the soakaway
with the right mouse button. Holding the button down, drag the green line
that appears to the inflow arrow on the pond icon and release the mouse
button. Repeat this for the car park.
With both links defined, click GO to run the Cascade analysis and save the
file when prompted as Example10.casx.
Page 10.22
Example 10
We now have a detailed analysis for the whole storage system. You can
switch between the results for each structure using the Pond Selector. Select
the Pond structure.
From the results we can see that the Pond overflow has been activated so we
need to go back and enlarge the size of the structure.
Re-designing the Pond
To re-load the original pond design file simply click the Edit button on the
Pond Selector when Pond is selected. This reopens the file at the storage
structure form for editing.
Increase the size of the pond to 1080m2 by clicking the Scale Factor arrow up
until it says 20 or typing 20 in the box.
Example 10
Page 10.23
Click the Scale button and it will automatically scale each number in the
table by 20%. Click OK, run the analysis and save the file.
We must now re-run the Cascade analysis. Click on the Cascade button and
the Cascade Sequence form still contains the original data. Click GO to run
the analysis again and then save when prompted.
The results show that enlarging the Pond by 20% stops the overflow from
activating. Here, however, the Pond uses a total of 1040.9m3 of storage.
With the soakaways and the car park we now have a total of 2178.3m3, in the
middle of the range originally given by the Quick Storage Estimate.
Page 10.24
Example 10
Graphics and animation
Source Control incorporates a variety of graphical representations of the

designs. They are available for each component of the system and may be
used in conjunction with each set of results as they are presented.
However, for the purposes of this example we shall look at them here in
order to demonstrate the versatility of the Pond Selector.
Select the Graphs option by clicking the Graphs icon.
Graphs
The graphs for the structure selected in the Pond Selector appear. Again, you
can switch between the structures using the Pond Selector.
The available graphs can be selected from the toolbar, click Show Total
Flow/Component to ensure all flows are displayed.
Example 10
Page 10.25
For an animated representation of the control, click the Animation icon.

Animation
The animation for the soakaway is shown below.
As with all Micro Drainage animations, the Video Controls form appears
with controls similar to those on a media player, play, pause, advance and so
on. The trace icon on the left of the toolbar is selected, giving a visual
representation of the process of the storm. You can use the Storm Selector to
switch storm durations and the Pond Selector to choose another structure.
Source Control also enables you to view an animation of the complete
system. To do this, select Animation from the Cascade menu.
Page 10.26
Example 10
The structures work in the same way and you can see the whole system in
operation, with the relationships between the structures clearly shown.
The animation may also be viewed in 3D by selecting 3D Animation from
the Cascade menu.
Example 10
Page 10.27
Note: You may not wish to use soakaways of the same design for the
whole project. Some areas of the site may cater for larger effective depths
while other areas may allow the placement of house soakaways.
The same may apply to the car park. In this example we have used a single
design of soakaway and car park to keep things simple.
If you do choose to use multiple designs, you will probably find it easiest
to design several batches of each structure before proceeding to link them
together in the Cascade stage.
CASDeF
Users with CASDeF can achieve a similar answer in a fraction of the time.
To demonstrate this open Soakaway.srcx by clicking Edit on the Pond
Selector when Soakaways is selected and downsize the number of soakaways
used to 1.
Select CASDeF Controller from the Edit menu and set the Maximum
Allowable Water Level to 101m. This means CASDeF will size the number
of soakaways to keep the depth of water below 1 m.
Select the Analyse menu or click the drop down arrow next to the GO icon
and choose CASDeF Analysis.
The Summary of Results show a Maximum Water Level of 100.998 with 9.8
l/s discharge. View the Soakaway details and you will see CASDeF has
achieved this with 714 soakaways.
Page 10.28
Example 10
Follow the same procedure with the carpark. Downsize the carpark width to
1m and set the Maximum Allowable Water Level to 100.4. CASDeF sets the
width to 62.8m, which produces an acceptable result.
As before we cannot design the pond in this way, as the inflow from the other
two structures is required. Open the pond file and set to pond area to 1m2. Set
the Maximum Allowable Water Level to 100 (the overflow level). Run the
analysis as normal. Dont worry if the pond fails at this point.
Re-open the original Cascade file and accept the warning. Instead of clicking
GO click the CASDeF icon.
CASDeF
CASDeF runs the Cascade analysis but upsizes each of the structures as
required.
The Summary shows all our requirements have been met. In fact CASDeF
has produced a solution that uses smaller structures than our original design.
Example 10
Page 10.29
Joined up Thinking
Having designed our three structures and shown they will work together the
last stage of the design process is to test them 'in situ'. We can download the
structures into Simulation to test the effects of the connecting pipe network.
Simulation
The network we will be using is supplied with the software. It will have been
installed to your machine during the Setup process. Start Network using your
preferred method. At the Open screen select Open Existing File and load the
file Example10.mdx from your \Micro Drainage 2014\Data directory.
The outflow controls have already been defined. These can be seen by
selecting Online Controls from the Network menu.
The only thing left for us to do is to incorporate the three storage structures.
Note: When we download structures from Source Control, Simulation will
only incorporate the appropriate volume and infiltration rates. Any outflow
or overflow controls must be re-defined by the user in Simulation.
Page 10.30
Example 10
Drag & Drop
We are now ready to drop the pond and infiltration systems into the network.
Open the Plan (available from the Graphics menu) and from the toolbar click
on the Toolbox icon and click on the Structures tab.
Toolbox
Drag the Lined Soakaway icon and drop it on the upstream of pipe 1.001.
The DS Pipe Number and Control type have been filled in for you. Click the
Import button and choose Soakaway.srcx. The file is loaded and the rest of
the details filled in for you. Click OK to return to the Plan.
Now use the same procedure to add Carpark.srcx to the upstream manhole of
2.001 and the Pond.srcx to the upstream manhole of 1.004.
Note: More details can be found on the use of Simulation and drag-drop
controls in Example 7.
Example 10
Page 10.31
The Full Picture
Click GO to run the Analysis.

When the results are displayed, click on the Summary Preferences icon and
turn on the Infiltration Flow column.
Simulation has performed a full hydrograph analysis including backwater

effects and we can see our design still operates as expected. These results are
for the 360 minute Winter storm (the critical duration in Cascade) but in a
real job it would be necessary to run a full range of storms. (See Example 8).
Note: If you have not used CASDeF in Source Control the results obtained
from Simulation will be slightly different to what is shown above.
Conclusion
Source Control has enabled us to design a complex and sophisticated system

in a few easy steps, with checks and error controls at each stage:
Quick Storage Estimate gives a useful indication of the likely storage

requirement and also serves as a feasibility study on the effect of using
infiltration.
The Quick Design tool gives rough sizes for each infiltration structure
and these enable you to complete detailed designs for the infiltration
structures quickly and easily.
The final storage structure is then completed, using the Quick Storage
Estimate result to help calculate the likely required size.
The Cascade tool uses a graphical user interface to design the finished
control structure. Source Control then calculates final results for the
complete inter-connected system.
Each of the storage structures can be downloaded into Simulation to
give a complete design including all of the interconnecting pipe work.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 6/1/2014
File Soakaways.srcx
XP Solutions
Page 32
Example 10
Source Control
Checked by
Half Drain Time : 47 minutes.
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
15
30
60
120
180
240
Storm
Event
Max
Level
(m)
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
100.676
100.812
100.871
100.858
100.808
100.753
100.657
100.577
100.509
100.452
100.359
100.235
100.135
100.080
100.043
100.035
100.029
100.025
100.022
100.763
100.922
100.988
100.957
100.879
100.799
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Status
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Depth Infiltration Control Outflow Volume
(m)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(m)
0.676
0.812
0.871
0.858
0.808
0.753
0.657
0.577
0.509
0.452
0.359
0.235
0.135
0.080
0.043
0.035
0.029
0.025
0.022
0.763
0.922
0.988
0.957
0.879
0.799
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.2
6.2
3.1
1.2
0.8
0.6
0.5
0.4
9.4
9.6
9.8
9.7
9.4
9.4
118.1
133.2
139.8
138.4
132.8
126.7
116.1
107.3
100.1
94.1
84.4
71.0
57.3
48.2
37.4
29.9
25.1
21.6
19.0
127.8
145.6
153.0
149.5
140.8
131.8
482.8
580.0
621.9
613.0
576.9
537.8
469.0
412.0
363.8
322.5
256.3
167.8
96.6
57.2
30.8
24.7
20.7
17.9
15.7
545.0
658.3
705.6
683.4
628.2
570.5
Rain
(mins)
Volume
(mm/hr) Volume
(m)
(m)
Storm
Event
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
15
30
60
120
180
240
109.4
124.1
130.5
129.1
123.7
117.7
107.4
98.7
91.4
85.2
75.2
61.8
51.1
45.1
36.2
29.1
24.5
21.1
18.6
118.9
136.0
143.1
139.8
131.4
122.7
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
76.035
49.499
30.811
18.615
13.715
10.995
8.034
6.428
5.404
4.687
3.743
2.723
1.979
1.577
1.143
0.910
0.762
0.659
0.583
76.035
49.499
30.811
18.615
13.715
10.995
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
569.9
742.1
924.0
1116.5
1234.0
1319.0
1445.8
1542.4
1620.7
1687.1
1796.4
1960.3
2136.7
2270.0
2469.6
2620.2
2742.5
2845.7
2935.7
638.4
831.2
1034.9
1250.5
1382.2
1477.3
19
31
50
84
118
152
218
282
344
406
530
768
1128
1476
2192
2888
3576
4304
5136
19
31
52
90
126
162
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 6/1/2014
File Soakaways.srcx
XP Solutions
Page 33
Example 10
Source Control
Checked by
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
Storm
Event
Max
Level
(m)
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
100.662
100.553
100.464
100.391
100.280
100.154
100.064
100.043
100.032
100.025
100.021
100.018
100.016
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Status
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Depth Infiltration Control Outflow Volume
(m)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(m)
0.662
0.553
0.464
0.391
0.280
0.154
0.064
0.043
0.032
0.025
0.021
0.018
0.016
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
7.1
2.2
1.2
0.7
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
116.6
104.8
95.4
87.8
76.1
60.1
45.6
37.4
27.3
21.6
18.2
15.6
13.8
472.7
395.0
331.6
279.3
200.2
109.7
45.7
30.7
22.5
17.9
15.1
13.0
11.5
Rain
(mins)
Volume
(mm/hr) Volume
(m)
(m)
Storm
Event
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
107.9
96.1
86.6
78.7
66.7
53.1
43.3
36.2
26.6
21.1
17.8
15.3
13.6
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
8.034
6.428
5.404
4.687
3.743
2.723
1.979
1.577
1.143
0.910
0.762
0.659
0.583
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1619.4
1727.5
1815.3
1889.6
2012.0
2195.6
2393.2
2542.3
2766.0
2934.7
3071.5
3187.4
3288.2
230
296
360
422
544
780
1128
1460
2188
2904
3616
4248
4992
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 6/1/2014
File Soakaways.srcx
XP Solutions
Page 34
Example 10
Source Control
Checked by
Rainfall Details
Rainfall Model
FSR
Winter Storms
Yes
30
Cv (Summer) 0.750
Cv (Winter) 0.840
M5-60 (mm)
20.000 Shortest Storm (mins)
15
Ratio R
0.400 Longest Storm (mins) 10080
Summer Storms
Yes
Climate Change %
+0
Time Area Diagram
Total Area (ha) 4.000
Time (mins)
From:
To:
0
Area
(ha)
4 2.000
Time (mins)
From:
To:
4
Area
(ha)
8 2.000
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 6/1/2014
File Soakaways.srcx
XP Solutions
Page 35
Example 10
Source Control
Checked by
Model Details
Lined Soakaway Structure
Infiltration Coefficient Base (m/hr) 0.20000

Ring Diameter (m) 0.90
Infiltration Coefficient Side (m/hr) 0.20000
Pit Multiplier
1.5
Safety Factor
2.0
Number Required
720
Porosity
0.30
Cap Volume Depth (m) 0.000
Invert Level (m) 100.000 Cap Infiltration Depth (m) 0.000
Hydro-Brake Outflow Control
Diameter (mm)
131
0.100
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
4.3
8.7
9.4
9.0
8.7
8.6
0.800
1.000
1.200
1.400
1.600
1.800
9.1
9.9
10.8
11.6
12.4
13.1
2.000
2.200
2.400
2.600
3.000
3.500
13.8
14.5
15.2
15.8
17.0
18.3
4.000
4.500
5.000
5.500
6.000
6.500
19.6
20.8
21.9
23.0
24.0
25.0
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
25.9
26.8
27.7
28.5
29.4
30.2
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 6/1/2014
File Example10.casx
XP Solutions
Page 36
Example 10
Source Control
Checked by
Source Control 2013.1.7
Cascade Summary of Results for Pond.srcx
Upstream
Structures
CarPark.srcx
Soakaways.srcx
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
99.393
99.511
99.632
99.749
99.800
99.824
99.837
99.818
99.799
99.783
99.754
99.689
99.577
99.480
99.348
99.249
99.172
99.113
99.067
99.442
99.575
99.713
99.848
Storm
Event
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
15
30
60
120
(None)
(None)
Status
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Level Depth Control Overflow Outflow Volume
(m)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(m)
(m)
Storm
Event
15
30
60
120
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
15
30
60
120
Outflow To Overflow To
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Summer
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
0.393
0.511
0.632
0.749
0.800
0.824
0.837
0.818
0.799
0.783
0.754
0.689
0.577
0.480
0.348
0.249
0.172
0.113
0.067
0.442
0.575
0.713
0.848
15.4
16.4
17.3
18.2
18.6
18.8
18.8
18.7
18.6
18.5
18.2
17.8
16.9
16.1
15.0
14.1
13.4
12.8
12.3
15.8
16.9
17.9
18.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
15.4
16.4
17.3
18.2
18.6
18.8
18.8
18.7
18.6
18.5
18.2
17.8
16.9
16.1
15.0
14.1
13.4
12.8
12.3
15.8
16.9
17.9
18.9
424.8
552.2
682.9
808.7
864.4
889.8
904.1
883.9
863.3
845.2
814.2
744.3
622.7
518.5
375.6
269.1
186.0
121.9
72.5
477.1
621.1
769.5
915.7
Rain
(mins)
Volume
Volume
(mm/hr) Volume
(m)
(m)
(m)
76.035
49.499
30.811
18.615
13.715
10.995
8.034
6.428
5.404
4.687
3.743
2.723
1.979
1.577
1.143
0.910
0.762
0.659
0.583
76.035
49.499
30.811
18.615
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
499.1
648.9
806.1
969.0
1065.3
1134.7
1238.7
1313.4
1375.0
1429.8
1521.8
1644.6
1749.1
1826.6
1976.4
2095.6
2194.3
2280.6
2353.9
559.1
728.0
904.4
1086.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
36
51
70
128
186
244
362
430
488
548
674
938
1344
1736
2512
3232
3960
4664
5344
40
56
76
126
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 6/1/2014
File Example10.casx
XP Solutions
Page 37
Example 10
Source Control
Checked by
Cascade Summary of Results for Pond.srcx
Status
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Level Depth Control Overflow Outflow Volume
(m)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(l/s)
(m)
(m)
Storm
Event
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
99.913
99.941
99.964
99.961
99.943
99.928
99.884
99.764
99.593
99.479
99.304
99.174
99.080
99.018
99.000
Storm
Event
180
240
360
480
600
720
960
1440
2160
2880
4320
5760
7200
8640
10080
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
min
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
Winter
0.913
0.941
0.964
0.961
0.943
0.928
0.884
0.764
0.593
0.479
0.304
0.174
0.080
0.018
0.000
19.4
19.6
19.7
19.7
19.6
19.5
19.2
18.3
17.0
16.1
14.6
13.4
12.4
11.7
11.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
19.4
19.6
19.7
19.7
19.6
19.5
19.2
18.3
17.0
16.1
14.6
13.4
12.4
11.7
11.0
985.7
1016.1
1041.3
1038.1
1018.4
1001.9
954.8
824.9
640.0
517.8
328.4
188.1
86.7
19.0
0.0
Rain
(mins)
Volume
Volume
(mm/hr) Volume
(m)
(m)
(m)
13.715
10.995
8.034
6.428
5.404
4.687
3.743
2.723
1.979
1.577
1.143
0.910
0.762
0.659
0.583
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1195.0
1269.2
1383.2
1475.7
1550.7
1616.0
1717.4
1827.3
1922.6
2034.1
2210.3
2345.5
2455.4
2551.5
2634.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
182
240
356
458
522
576
716
1014
1452
1872
2640
3368
4040
4592
0
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 6/1/2014
File Example10.casx
XP Solutions
Page 38
Example 10
Source Control
Checked by
Cascade Model Details for Pond.srcx
Tank or Pond Structure
Depth (m) Area (m)
0.000
1080.0
Crown Vortex Valve Outflow Control

Design Head (m) 1.500 Vortex Valve Type R1 SW Only Invert Level (m) 98.500
Diameter (mm)
166
0.100
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
3.0
7.3
10.3
10.3
11.5
12.6
0.800
1.000
1.200
1.400
1.600
1.800
14.6
16.3
17.9
19.3
20.6
21.9
2.000
2.200
2.400
2.600
3.000
3.500
23.0
24.2
25.2
26.3
28.2
30.5
4.000
4.500
5.000
5.500
6.000
6.500
32.6
34.6
36.4
38.2
39.9
41.5
Weir Overflow Control

7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
43.1
44.6
46.1
47.5
48.9
50.2
Example 11
Page 11.1

Example 11 - QuOST
Quantities & Costings
Page 11.2
Example 11
Introduction
QuOST saves the engineer time and money by automating the processes of
taking off, billing and pricing a job. In doing so, it also provides a quick
means of comparing the cost implications of various design options.
The QuOST module integrates with System 1 to produce costs and quantities
from the data it generates. All materials, pipe specifications and other key
variables are user-definable.
Specifications supported include CESMM, SMM, Method of Measurement
for Highway Works and the user's own specifications.
In this example we shall see how QuOST uses the parameters defined in a
Classification Library to classify each pipe and manhole in the system
automatically. We will also use QuOST to calculate the excavation volumes
for different construction methods and techniques. The example has three
phases:
First we will call a file and use the default classifications to analyse the
taking off, etc.
Then we will tailor our own set of classifications to our own company
needs.
Finally we will analyse the network again using the new classifications.
The analysis is very quick and as the classifications are saved they may
be used on other projects.
Example 11
Page 11.3
Opening QuOST
Open QuOST by clicking on the icon in the Micro Drainage 2014 file, in
your start menu. You are presented with the QuOST Open screen.
Select Open Existing File by double clicking on the icon. The data for this
example is contained on your master program disk with the file name
Example11.mdx. This file will be copied to the hard disk of your PC when
you install Micro Drainage.
The first time you open a design in QuOST it is classified with the current
(default) library. To change the library, select Network Classifications from
the Network menu. Click the Classifications button on the Network
Classifications toolbar.
Classifications
Click the Import icon and select the file Example11.tokx. The classifications
library is now loaded; this will be saved within Example11.mdx the next time
you save the file. Click the OK button.
A full breakdown of the job is immediately available; select Take Off Data
from the Results menu.
Take Off Data
A Windows Explorer-style screen appears, showing a summary of the Take
Off data. A full take off of the job is presented to you.
Page 11.4
Example 11
The data can be viewed in a number of ways, either as a summation of totals

of pipe / manhole types or as an individual breakdown of each pipe run,
manholes and materials.
If you expand the Project icon in the tree (by clicking the small +), a series of
sub-menus (branches) appear. These give you a breakdown for the project,
enabling you to work with as much or as little detail as you require. Try
expanding different branches in the tree to see the different sets of data
available. Highlight an entry and the corresponding data is displayed on the
right of the screen.
The program has applied a classification from our library to each of the pipes
and manholes in the network based on a set of pre-defined rules. However it
is unlikely in a real job that the whole network will automatically be
classified correctly.
Example 11
Page 11.5
Network Classifications
To change any of the classifications, select Network Classifications from the

Network menu.
A Pipe Type and Manhole Type can be chosen for each pipe in the network.
Click on the small arrow to see a list of all the available entries. There is an
entry on the list for each item in the Classification library. Try changing the
Pipe Type for Pipe 1.000.
The entry turns red. This is similar to System 1 and denotes user
specification. If the program chooses a class it is displayed in blue. Move the
cursor to the second pipe. The Pipe Class for Pipe 1.000 is shown on a yellow
background. QuOST allows the user to choose any of the available classes
for any location in the network. However if this breaks one of the rules
defined in the library the entry is highlighted in yellow. We will look at
defining classification rules later in this example.
Page 11.6
Example 11
To return the pipe to its original class select Re-classify from the list.
Most specifications require ground level data at a given interval between the
manholes. QuOST can divide the total length by up to ten intervals, with the
facility to assign ground levels to the intermediate chainages. These values
are taken into account when the volumes of excavation and pipe lengths for
different depth bandings are calculated.
Sometimes a pipe or manhole cannot be classified under any of the available
options. In this case the spreadsheet will display Re-classify and the user
should select the pipe or manhole type they wish to use.
QuOST incorporates many of the graphic features of Micro Drainage,
including the Network Schematic and Longsections resources. These can be
accessed via the icons on the toolbar in the usual way, or from the Graphics
menu.
In this example we have based the taking off on Sewers For Adoption and
CESMM, as these dictate how the measurements are classified. The table can
be set up for any specification, and is split into seven different fields. These
are General Items, Pipes, Manholes, Depth bands, Miscellaneous, Storage
Structures and Flow Controls. (The last two are only available if Simulation
is available).
The Classification Library
Open the Classification Library by selecting the Classifications Library

button from the Network Classifications toolbar.
Classifications Library
Example 11
Page 11.7
General classifications
These settings cover the basic elements used in the construction of manholes
and pipelines. These include manhole cover types and the general materials
used, such as pipe surrounds and the concrete used for the construction of
manhole bases and the surrounds to the manhole rings.
As the table shows, in this example there are three different manhole covers
specified: heavy, medium and light. The description field allows a full
description of the cover to be entered for reference purposes. Each cover type
can be assigned to a different type of manhole classification.
The Material Types section allows the entry of all the different types of
materials that will be used. These may include the types of concrete and
granular surround for pipe bedding. Note that here we have specified all
concrete for the bases and manhole surrounds as Class C20 and that the pipe
bedding is either granular Type A or B.
To proceed, click on the Pipes tab.
Page 11.8
Example 11
Pipes
The classification of the pipes is based on the diameter and the proposed
depth of construction. Most pipes are made either from clay or concrete. Clay
is generally used for smaller diameter pipes: 100, 150, 225, 300, 375 and 400
mm. Above 400 mm, clay becomes expensive and less robust. Accordingly,
concrete is used for pipes of 400 mm or greater.
The depth at which the pipe will be laid is also important in determining the
pipe specification. The deeper the pipe, the greater the external loading it will
have to bear.
Within CESMM (Civil Engineering Standard Method of Measurement) there
are eight different classes of pipe, all of which are available in the pipe
classification list. You can scroll through these using the arrows at the bottom
of the page.
The Navigation Bar
Example 11
Page 11.9
The order of these groupings is critical for automatic classification. QuOST

tests each pipe in the network against each of the pipe classes, always
beginning with the first in the list. If this pipe does not match the
specification, it automatically moves to the next in the list. If no match is
found, the pipe will be deemed unclassified.
Controls are given to move records within the library, delete records or insert
copies. These are shown to the right of the navigation controls.
Record Controls
Since concrete pipes are the most common, concrete has been placed at the
beginning of the pipe Classification Table. The second classification is
conduit sections, since most conduits sections are also made of concrete. The
third is clay pipes, which are set for lower pipe diameters.
A general pipe thickness can be entered for each type of pipe. This value is
used when calculating the volume for the pipe surround, since the widths of
the trenches are based on a dimension taken from the internal diameter of the
pipe. The volume of the outer diameter of the pipe is subtracted from the
volume of the trench to give the correct volume fill.
Cost per Metre
This allows the entry of a cost per metre run of the pipe. A total including the
cost per metre of the surround material can also be included. Note that the
excavation costs and replacement costs are entered on the Depths and
Miscellaneous pages.
Bedding/Surround Depth
Pipes are usually laid on a bed of smooth material to minimise the occurrence
of high point loads that could damage the pipes. There is a minimum
requirement for the depth of this bedding and for the thickness of the material
surrounding the top of the pipe.
Entering these two factors enables QuOST to calculate the total volume of
surround required for each pipe. In most cases, the material will be a granular
compound, though other materials are sometimes used. In particular, pipes
that are to be laid close to ground level are often encased in concrete for
Page 11.10
Example 11
added robustness. This specification can be changed by selecting

Classifications Library button from the Network Classifications toolbar.
The list box shows all the materials entered under the General section; click
on the arrow to see the list. You can then simply click on the relevant
material for the pipe classification in question.
Surround Material
Trench widths
Naturally, trench widths vary according to the diameter of the pipe, although
minimum widths are usually specified. Most pipes are laid in trenches that
have vertical sides; i.e. the width at the bottom is the same as the width at the
top.
However, when pipes are laid very deep, the sides are usually sloped (or
'battered') to reduce the likelihood of collapsing. The last two fields can be
used to take account of this scenario.
Manholes
This classification has been set up for Sewers for Adoption. Within this, there
are six manhole classifications: A, B, C, D, E and F. The classifications are
based on the depth and diameter of each manhole. Sewers for Adoption also
shows the arrangement of each classification, for example the amount of
concrete to be used in the surrounds and the bases.
In our example, the first manhole shown is Type A. This should be used
when the depth of pipe (to the soffit) is between 3 and 6 metres. These
manholes are therefore quite large and in our table we have specified that any
manhole greater than 1050 mm in diameter, and with a depth greater than 3
metres, will automatically be classed as a Type A.
Each of the remaining types has been set in accordance with Sewers for
Adoption. However, we have also included another type, classified Make it
C! This is classification 3 - use the scroll arrows to find it.
Example 11
Page 11.11
Most manholes used in drainage are circular, and System 1 specifies circular
manholes by default. However if the manhole is between 1 metre and 1.45
metres deep, then Sewers for Adoption states it should be a Type C manhole,
which is rectangular.
The Make it C! classification enables QuOST to highlight the anomaly, so
that you can decide either to make the manhole deeper or change it to the
correct size. A full list of the manholes falling into this category is given in
the breakdown section of QuOST.
Note: If you are not working with Sewers for Adoption, you can enter your
own specifications for the classifications you require.
Page 11.12
Example 11
Depths
As a rule of thumb, the deeper you lay a pipe, the more expensive it gets.
Depths, therefore, are a critical consideration when costing a job.
Because the pipes are laid on a gradient, they will usually pass through a
series of depth bands. The method of specifying the length of pipe allowable
between different depth band increments varies according to the specification
you are working to. In this example, the increments are 0.5 metres below a
depth of 1.5 metres, which is in line with CESMM.
QuOST will automatically calculate the length of pipe within each band. If
you enter the excavation cost per cubic metre for each band, the program will
also work out the total cost for this aspect of the job.
Example 11
Page 11.13
Miscellaneous
Here we find all the additional variables that contribute to the costs and
quantities of the job. These fields enable you to enter values for Blinding
concrete, the replacement of excavated material and the cost of removing the
material displaced by the pipe and its surround material. The Reinstatement
costs cover general landscaping and the Bulking Factor allows you to cost the
percentage increase in the volume of the material to be removed.
Page 11.14
Example 11
Storage Structures (Simulation only)
QuOST allows storage structures to be included in the costing. Each type of

storage structure can be individually priced based on cost per m3. The
infiltration structures can only be priced if Source Control is available.
Flow Controls (Simulation only)
QuOST also allows flow controls to be included in the costing. Each type of
control can be priced individually.
Example 11
Page 11.15
Building a classification table
Now we will build our own classification table to a site-specific specification

(as set out below).
MD Pipe Specification
Pipe Type
Clay
Clay
Concrete
Concrete
Strength
of Pipe
Standard
Super
Standard
Super
Diameters
(mm)
100 - 375
100 375
375 1800
375 - 1800
Pipe
Thickness
50
75
75
75
Min
Depth
0
1.200
0
1.600
Max
Depth
1.200
2.000 *
1.600
6.000
*Any pipe greater than 2 metres deep should be concrete
MD Manhole Specification
TYPE
1
2
3
4
Cover
Type
Light
Medium
Heavy
Heavy
Diameters
(mm)
1050 1200
1200 +
1350 1500
1500 4000
Min
Depth
0
1.0
2.0
2.0
Max
Depth
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
All manhole bases shall be 300mm deep and have 75mm of blinding
concrete.
Trench Construction
Pipe Diameter
(mm)
< 375
375 450
450 600
600 900
900 >
Trench Width
(mm)
300 + pipe diameter
500 + pipe diameter
500 + pipe diameter
500 + pipe diameter
750 + pipe diameter
Page 11.16
Example 11
Depth Bands
Lengths of pipe will be classified in bands of 250mm below a depth of 1

metre.
Materials
All clay pipes will be bedded and covered with surround type Agg 1 and all
concrete pipes will have surround type Agg 2, to a depth of 300mm above
and below the pipe. The concrete for manhole surrounds shall be 150mm
thick type Con 1 and the concrete used in pipe surrounds shall be type Con 2.
General Classes
To start entering a new Classification Library click the New icon. If a prompt
appears asking you to Save click No.
New Classification
Click on the General tab and you are ready to begin. From the specification
shown below, enter all the data referring to the manhole covers, together with
the materials used in the construction of the manholes and pipe runs. To do
this, simply click in the relevant field and type in the entry.
Example 11
Page 11.17
In this example we will not be specifying any unit costs for the project. Once
the data has been entered we can move on to the pipe entries by selecting the
Pipes tab.
Pipe Classes
The specification has four types of pipes, but the trench width will vary
according to the pipe diameter. We will therefore specify six different entries
to accommodate the change in trench width for pipes over 900mm in
diameter.
For the first pipe, enter Clay - Standard Strength for diameters 100 375mm.
From the specification above, we can enter all the relevant data in the boxes
provided.
The entry for Surround Material is selected by using the drop down box.
Click on the arrow and the program will give you the range of materials you
specified in the General Items. For the first pipe class, choose Agg 1.
When the data entry is complete click the New Record button to save this
classification and move onto the next one.
New Record
Page 11.18
Example 11
Alternatively use the Copy button to produce an identical record to the one
you've just entered. This limits data entry if several classes share similar
characteristics.
Copy
Proceed to enter the data for the other 5 pipe classes as shown.
Example 11
Page 11.19
Note: We have used the postfix T1 and T2 to distinguish between the two
different trench widths. It is important to use different names so that we
can tell which classification has been used to generate the Taking Off
information.
Manhole Classes
The specification contains four types of manholes. QuOST will dynamically

change the type of manhole based on the diameter and depth of the pipe.
All the manholes on this project are circular, so we need only insert the data
for the minimum and maximum diameters, together with construction details
such as surround thickness, base depths and so on. Use the drop-down menus
to select the correct cover type and material type for each manhole.
As before, use the arrows to move to the next entries, or use Copy and amend
the data to suit each manhole type.
Page 11.20
Depth Bands
Example 11
QuOST will automatically calculate the length of each pipe run that falls
within each individual banding. The specification states that pipes at a depth
of less than 1 metre from ground level to the invert shall be classified in one
band. After 1 metre, the banding increments go up in steps of 250mm. Enter
the data as shown.
Example 11
Page 11.21
Miscellaneous Items, Storage Structures

and Flow Controls
Here we can specify costs for the excavated material. We cost the volume for
replacement and removal, but we also specify a reinstatement cost per square
metre. This function is useful for the reinstatement of roads or verges.
A price for blinding concrete can also be assigned, in addition to a bulking
factor, expressed as a percentage.
Costs for storage structures and flow controls can also be specified in the
respective tabs allowing the whole design to be priced.
We are not producing costings for this example so all the entries can be left
as 0.
Page 11.22
Example 11
Re-Classify
The classifications library can be saved and used on future projects by
clicking on Export and enter the file name as Example11a.tokx.
Export
Then click OK to proceed.
The Storm file we loaded at the beginning of this example will still be open.
QuOST will have automatically applied the new library and produced new
Taking Off information.
When you open the Taking Off information you are presented with a
warning.
To see how the classifications have been applied and which pipes are
unclassified open the Network Classifications.
Network Classifications.
As you scroll through the network classifications sheet you will see that
QuOST has assigned the correct pipe type and manhole type for each pipe
run. You will also notice that there are a number of pipes that do not have a
pipe or a manhole assigned to them. Indeed, in two cases there is neither a
pipe classification nor a manhole type specified.
In these cases the pipes have fallen between the classifications. We can now
look into these cases in more depth and assign the classifications manually.
Example 11
Page 11.23
Unclassified Pipes
Pipes 4.002, 4.003, 4.004 and 5.004 have no pipe types assigned to them.
Pipes 4.002, 4.003, 4.004 and 5.004
These pipes are all 225mm diameter and have depths greater than 2m. In the
classification table, we have specified clay pipes to be assigned for depths
less than 2m. However, the maximum depth for these four pipes is 2.419m.
Click on the Classifications icon again.
Classifications
Click on the Pipes tab and use the cursor buttons to move to the second entry
(Clay Super Strength). Change the maximum depth from 2.000m to
2.500m. Then click OK. The Network Classifications shows that all the
pipes have now been classified.
Unclassified Manholes
Manholes 24 and 25 are also unclassified. These two manholes do not fall
within a classification range and are both 1200mm in diameter. In the
manhole classification table, 1200mm manholes are classified as Type 2, but
the maximum depth has been set to 2m.
Accordingly, we will manually select Type 2 for these manholes by clicking
on Type 2 in the drop down box.
The manholes are highlighted in yellow to indicate that they do not fulfil the
specified rules. (It may be appropriate to return to System 1 and alter the
manhole diameters to 1350mm and use a Type 3 manhole).
All the pipes and manholes have now been assigned a type and the
classifications are satisfactory.
Page 11.24
Example 11
Taking Off
When you are satisfied that all the specifications and classifications are
correct, you can view the Taking Off data.
Select Take Off Data from the Results menu.
Take Off Data
This time there is no warning as all the pipes and manholes have been
classified. It is important that the Taking Off information is not used whilst
this warning is present. Totals for pipe lengths, excavation volumes etc do
not take unclassified entries into account!
The data can be calculated by defining the lengths of pipe runs in two
different formats.
In the toolbar menu, use the pull down menu for Length Calc's based on to
switch between Centre-Centre and True Length. Centre-Centre is the length
calculated from the centre of one manhole to the centre of the other manhole.
True Length is the actual length of pipe, measured from the inside faces of
the manholes.
Example 11
Page 11.25
Project
The breakdown for the project gives an overview of the design as a whole,
with total numbers of pipes, total length and an overview of the volume of
the pipe capacity. A summation of manholes is also given, showing the
number, the accumulated depth and the total volume in the manholes.
Totals
The subheadings under the Totals listing give a complete summation for each
classification. Total lengths, numbers and volumes are all given. Click on the
Totals menu to view the totals for manholes and pipes.
Breakdown
Breakdown will give you a fully itemised bill of all the pipes, manholes and
material, broken down either by size or by class. It also gives locations,
lengths and depths. Open the Breakdown folder and have a look at the
entries.
Finally click on the Ground Works folder under Breakdown and select Depth
Bands. You will now be presented with a full breakdown for every pipe,
showing how much of that individual pipe falls within each depth band. This
is shown instantly, eliminating a costly and time-consuming manual task that
has been the scourge of engineers and technicians for years.
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 07/01/2014
File Example11.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 26
Example 11
QuOST
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Classification
Classification Example Specification
Currency Symbol
Manhole Covers
Name
Description
Light Light Duty, residential only

Medium
Medium Duty, light traffic
Heavy
Heavy Duty, main roads
Material Types
Name Cost (/m)
Con
Con
Agg
Agg
1
2
1
2
Description
0.00
Concrete for manholes
0.00
Concrete for pipes
0.00
Surround for clay pipes
0.00 Surround for concrete pipes
Pipe Types
Name / Description Clay - Standard strength

Design Diameter Min/Max (mm)
100 / 375
Cover Depth for Pipe Min/Max (m)
0 / 1.2
Pipe Thickness (mm)
50
Cost (/m)
0
Bedding / Surround Depth below pipe (mm)
300
Bedding / Surround Depth above pipe (mm)
300
Surround Material
Agg 1
Trench Width at base : D + mm
300
Trench Width at cover : D + mm
300
Trench Depth at Width change (m)
0
Working Surface : D + mm
300
Name / Description Clay - Super Strength
100 / 375
1.2 / 2.5
Pipe Thickness (mm)
75
Cost (/m)
0
300
300
Surround Material
Agg 1
300
300
0
300
Name / Description Concrete - Standard - T1
375 / 900
0 / 1.6
Pipe Thickness (mm)
75
Cost (/m)
0
300
300
Surround Material
Agg 2
500
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 07/01/2014
File Example11.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 27
Example 11
QuOST
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Pipe Types
500
0
500
Name / Description Concrete - Standard - T2

901 / 1800
0 / 1.6
Pipe Thickness (mm)
75
Cost (/m)
0
300
300
Surround Material
Agg 2
750
750
0
750
Name / Description Concrete - Super - T1
375 / 900
1.6 / 6
Pipe Thickness (mm)
100
Cost (/m)
0
300
300
Surround Material
Agg 2
500
500
0
500
Name / Description Concrete - Super - T2
901 / 4800
1.6 / 6
Pipe Thickness (mm)
100
Cost (/m)
0
300
300
Surround Material
Agg 2
750
750
0
750
Manhole Types
Name / Description
TYPE 1
Internal Diameter Min/Max (mm) 1050 / 1200
Internal Width Min/Max (mm)
0 / 0
Ring Depth Min/Max (m)
0 / 1.5
Cover Type
Light
Cost (/m deep)
0
Ring Thickness (mm)
150
Surround Material
Con 1
Surround Thickness (mm)
150
Base Height (mm)
300
Base Material
Con 1
Blinding Height (mm)
75
Additional Costs ()
0
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 07/01/2014
File Example11.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 28
Example 11
QuOST
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Manhole Types
Name / Description
TYPE 2
0 / 0
1 / 2
Cover Type
Medium
Cost (/m deep)
0
Ring Thickness (mm)
150
Surround Material
Con 1
150
Base Height (mm)
300
Base Material
Con 1
75
Additional Costs ()
0
Name / Description
TYPE 3
0 / 0
2 / 3
Cover Type
Heavy
Cost (/m deep)
0
Ring Thickness (mm)
150
Surround Material
Con 1
150
Base Height (mm)
300
Base Material
Con 1
75
Additional Costs ()
0
Name / Description
TYPE 4
0 / 0
2 / 4
Cover Type
Heavy
Cost (/m deep)
0
Ring Thickness (mm)
150
Surround Material
Con 1
150
Base Height (mm)
300
Base Material
Con 1
75
Additional Costs ()
0
Depth Bands
Depth <= (m) Excavation Cost (/m)
1.000
1.250
1.500
1.750
2.000
2.250
2.500
2.750
3.000
3.250
3.500
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 07/01/2014
File Example11.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 29
Example 11
QuOST
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Depth Bands
Depth <= (m) Excavation Cost (/m)
3.750
4.000
0.00
0.00
Miscellaneous
MH Blinding Cost (/m)
Replacement Cost (/m)
Removal Cost (/m)
Reinstatement Cost (/m)
Bulking Factor (%)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Storage Structure Costs

Cost (/m)
Cost (/m)
Pipe
Tank or Pond
Box Culvert
Double Pipe
Double Box Culvert
Lined Soakaway
House Soakaway
Infiltration Trench
Trench Soakaway
Swale
Infiltration Basin
Infiltration Blanket
Porous Car Park
Cellular Storage
Dry Swale
Filter Drain
Bio-Retention Area
Sand Filter
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Flow Control Costs

Name
Cost (/unit)
Weir
Orifice
Gate
Depth/Flow Relationship
Pipe
V-Notch Weir
Pump
Hydro-Brake
Crown Vortex Valve
Filtration
Garastor
Level Controlled Pump
Siphon
Flap Valve
Non Return Valve
ACO Q-Brake
Hydroslide
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
XP Solutions
Jacobs Well
West Street
Newbury RG14 1BD
Date 07/01/2014
File Example11.mdx
XP Solutions
Page 30
Example 11
QuOST
Quantities and Costings
Checked by
Network 2013.1.7
Network Classifications for Example11
PN
1.000
1.001
1.002
2.000
2.001
2.002
1.003
1.004
1.005
1.006
1.007
1.008
1.009
3.000
3.001
3.002
3.003
3.004
3.005
1.010
4.000
4.001
4.002
4.003
4.004
1.011
5.000
5.001
5.002
5.003
5.004
1.012
1.013
1.014
1.015
USMH Pipe Min Cover Max Cover

Depth
Depth
Name Dia
(m)
(m)
(mm)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
300
375
375
150
150
150
375
450
450
450
600
600
600
150
225
225
225
300
300
600
150
150
225
225
225
675
150
150
150
150
225
1200
1200
1200
1200
0.900
1.010
1.046
1.350
1.350
1.356
1.646
1.531
1.531
1.554
1.674
1.667
1.667
1.350
1.350
1.350
1.350
1.350
1.357
1.814
1.350
1.621
1.847
2.018
2.174
2.355
1.350
1.414
1.638
1.638
1.669
3.257
3.207
3.037
3.037
Pipe Type
1.010 Clay - Standard strength

1.046 Clay - Standard strength
1.646
Clay - Super Strength
1.350
1.356
1.646
1.667
1.667
Concrete - Super - T1
1.554 Concrete - Standard - T1
1.674
1.739
1.739
1.814
1.372
1.372
1.350
1.350
1.357
1.814
2.419
1.621
1.847
2.018
2.174
2.419
2.419
1.414
1.657
1.657
1.669
2.320
3.400
3.257
3.207
3.201
MH Ring MH Type
MH
MH
Dia Width Depth
(m)
(mm) (mm)
1050
1350
1350
1050
1050
1050
1350
1350
1350
1350
1500
1500
1500
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1500
1050
1200
1200
1200
1200
1500
1050
1050
1200
1200
1200
2100
2100
2100
2100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.900
1.010
1.046
1.350
1.350
1.356
1.646
1.667
1.531
1.554
1.674
1.739
1.667
1.350
1.372
1.350
1.350
1.350
1.357
1.814
1.350
1.621
1.847
2.018
2.174
2.419
1.350
1.414
1.657
1.638
1.669
3.400
3.257
3.207
3.037
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
Example 12
Page 12.1

Example 12 DrawNet(CAD)
Working within AutoCAD
Page 12.2
Example 12
Introduction
In this example we will cover the key elements of working with
DrawNet(CAD) from setting up a network through to hydraulic analysis of
the network using Micro Drainage software.
In creating this example we have assumed that you have a basic working
knowledge of AutoCAD, as well as the System 1 and Simulation modules
within Micro Drainage. All the co-ordinates quoted are approximate; it is not
essential for you to be millimetre-perfect in your selections. This example has
been created using AutoCAD 2013 within Windows 7; there may be some
variation between your screen and those featured here.
Example 12
Loading DrawNet(CAD)
Page 12.3
Open DrawNet(CAD) using your preferred Windows option. DrawNet(CAD)

automatically loads within an AutoCAD profile specified during installation,
with the familiar AutoCAD welcome screen followed by a new, unnamed
document. From AutoCADs File menu, choose Open and choose
Example.dwg from the \DrawNet(CAD) 2014\Data directory.
The drawing below will be displayed.
Page 12.4
Example 12
One we made earlier
Now enlarge the top left-hand corner of the drawing (co-ordinates 55,370 to
the bottom left and 200,500 to the top right) by using AutoCAD's Zoom
command.
Note the blue dotted line within the highway, which shows where the pipe
network is to be placed. It has been put there to make it easier for you as you
familiarise yourself with the functions of DrawNet(CAD).
We will be following the line to create the network. The line has been drawn
with 3D co-ordinates (i.e. the 'z' co-ordinates) at the start and endpoints of
each section.
Remember that ordinary OS plans are not usually created in 3D, although the
'z' co-ordinate can be added in DrawNet(CAD), if it is known.
Other sources of drawings, such as surveys, highway layouts, architects'
layouts and others, are quite often in 3D, which is very helpful in developing
the drainage network.
Example 12
Page 12.5
Creating the network
We want to draw a Storm network over the AutoCAD drawing which

indicates the locations of pipes and manholes.
Select Load from the Site menu, as this is the first time a DrawNet(CAD)
command has been run within this drawing you will be presented with the
DrawNet(CAD) Open box.
Select New Storm and enter the Design Criteria for your Storm network as
below in the same way as you would in System1:
Page 12.6
Example 12
You can now start designing your Storm network. To setup a Foul or
Existing network(s) you can follow the same procedure as previously and
select the required Network type (please note that Existing Network(s) do not
require Design Criteria)
To change Network Type or Name you can load up the Network Manager in
the Site menu. You can add/remove Networks and edit a number of options
by using the Network Manager. The current Network will be highlighted in
light blue.
In this example we have used the (unoriginal) name Storm. Tick the Ask for
levels and accept the other settings by closing the form.
Example 12
Page 12.7
Creating a Network
Once your Design Criteria has been entered and you have closed the Network
Manager you are ready to start designing your network. Click on Define Pipe
in the Create/Edit menu.
You are prompted to enter the Upstream Manhole (USMH) position. Move
the crosshairs to the beginning of the blue line in the top left hand corner of
the screen.
'Pick' the end of the line by clicking as near to the end as you can with the left
hand mouse button you can use the same Object Snap options as you have
loaded into AutoCAD to snap to Endpoint/Midpoint etc..
Cover Levels will be read from the drawing and you can press the Enter key
to apply this level. Note that you can enter a cover level if the automatic
value is different. DrawNet(CAD) now prompts you for the next manhole
location. Each time a manhole is positioned, accept the default cover level by
pressing the Enter key.
Page 12.8
Example 12
Follow the blue lines to the Outfall location to the South and to complete the
network click the right hand mouse button and select the Close option from
the menu to end the network building session. This will result in 4 pipes,
1.000 1.003, as shown below.
You will see that DrawNet(CAD) draws the Network to match the Display
Settings in the Graphics menu. The pipes and manholes are numbered
automatically starting at the head of the line and working downstream to the
outfall. For drawing clarity you can reduce the pipe/manhole text size on the
Network Settings Tab. To do this change the Text Height to 2m and click
Apply.
Entering a new branch
As before use the Define Pipe command and pick the location using the
crosshairs and the left hand mouse button. It is, of course, at the end of the
branch running down the 'cul de sac' of the road south west of the
downstream end of pipe 1.000 (co-ordinates approximately 75,430).
Note: You may find it quicker to define the main run of your Network
and then choose New once you have reached your Outfall and continue
to define any Branch Lines.
At the Enter Downstream End command, click once more on the intersection
at the downstream end of pipe 1.000 and the new branch is created for you.
Example 12
Page 12.9
The new pipe is shown, together with its
manhole. DrawNet(CAD)'s automatic
numbering system designates the pipe
number 2.000.
Amend Network
We shall demonstrate the error correction facilities within DrawNet(CAD) by

removing and then replacing pipe 1.003.
Deleting a pipe
To remove a pipe from your network just click on the pipe and hit the
Delete button. If you have a large network you can use the Goto Pipe
under the Site menu and select the network and pipe number from the drop
down lists provided to find the Pipe.
Select Pipe 1.003 by left-clicking on mouse and hit the Delete button.
Pipe 1.003 is deleted from the network and DrawNet(CAD) automatically
renumbers the network for you.
Re-inserting a pipe
To re-insert pipe 1.003, select Define Pipe from the Create/Edit menu. At the
command for Enter the USMH position click at the downstream end of 1.002.
Then click at the fork as before and accept the cover level suggested.
Again, right click the drawing and select the Close option from the menu.
DrawNet(CAD) will automatically renumber the new pipe 1.003.
Page 12.10
Example 12
Inserting a manhole
We require another manhole halfway along pipe 1.001, this can easily be
achieved by selecting the Insert Manhole option from the Create/Edit menu.
Once again the crosshairs disappear and your cursor becomes a small box.
DrawNet(CAD) prompts you to Select pipe to insert a Manhole half way
along its length and watch as DrawNet(CAD) inserts a new pipe and manhole
then renumbers the network.
Move Manhole
It is possible to move manholes within your network simply by clicking on

them and dragging them to a new location. However for ease there is also a
Move Manhole command located in the Create/Edit menu. First of all Select
Manhole S3, at the US end of 1.003, and delete it by pressing the Delete key
with it selected. This will have the effect of deleting pipe 1.002 updating the
network as shown below.
Use the Move Manhole command to select the downstream manhole of pipe
1.001. This, of course, is connected to pipe 1.002 as well. It may be necessary
to use AutoCAD's zoom facility to get closer to the manhole in order to select
it.
Example 12
Page 12.11
When you have selected the manhole, you are prompted to pick a new
location for the manhole. Pick the intersection of the three blue dotted lines
where manhole S3 was deleted from and DrawNet(CAD) moves the manhole
to the new position and updates the connecting pipes.
Examining the network
The next stage is to look at some of the pipelines in more detail. To do this,
select Display DrawNet Properties from the Create/Edit menu. Alternatively
you can call up DrawNet Properties by right-clicking the mouse when a
DrawNet(CAD) entity is selected
Page 12.12
Example 12
Once the DrawNet Properties box has been loaded up you are able to view a
variety of details relating to the selected DrawNet(CAD) entity. The
Properties box is re-sizeable and can be set to auto-hide by pushing the pin
button on/off in the top right corner
You can view the properties on different entities by hitting Esc and selecting
another entity.
In the Properties box you choose additional annotation information to be
displayed against a Pipe or Manhole. Simply tick/un-tick any additional
information you want to display in the left hand column.
You can also edit details directly without the need to go back to the Network
Details. As per System1 any changes made to the network will result in the
Storm/Foul networks being redesigned accordingly.
Defining areas
There are two ways of defining a contributing area to a pipe. They can be
drawn out and assigned to a pipe or a known figure can be entered directly
via the Network Details or DrawNet Properties box against the pipe.
Storm and Existing Networks use Impermeable area rather than contributing
area as used by Foul networks. To this end when graphically defining areas
for Storm/Existing networks they will have a Percentage Impermeable
(PIMP) associated with them. i.e. 50% impermeable. When an Area is
defined you will be presented with three options for defining the PIMP:
Example 12
Page 12.13
User - A user specified PIMP value can be entered

Classification PIMP value is obtained from a PIMP Classification.
As Zoned PIMP value is determined from intersections with the
PIMP Zones that have been specified.
For the purposes of this example we will use the User and PIMP
Classifications approaches. Further information on the PIMP Zones approach
can be found in the Help.
Setting the PIMP Classifications
To define the PIMP Classifications, go to the Site menu and from it select
PIMP Classifications. DrawNet(CAD) will display the PIMP Classifications
dialog box.
For this example we will define three additional PIMP Classifications: Roof,
Road and Grass.
Click the Add PIMP Classification button.
Add PIMP Classification
In the PIMP Name box enter Roof and a value of 90 in the PIMP (%) box.
Press the Add PIMP Classification button again enter Road and a value of 80.
Finally enter Grass and a value of 25 for the third paved area factor.
Finally setup the PIMP Classification colours to match below by clicking on
the Area Colour and selecting a colour. To change the Area Hatch Pattern
Page 12.14
Example 12
click on the button and select a new hatch pattern. The PIMP
Classifications should be as shown below.
Click OK to close the PIMP Classifications dialogue box.
Marking out an area
Select Define Areas from the Create/Edit menu. The crosshairs disappear
and are replaced by the pick box, while you are prompted to select a pipe or
upstream manhole.
Move the box over any part of pipe 1.000 and click with the left hand mouse
button.
DrawNet(CAD) prompts you to Enter PIMP
Type for Area with the default value being
User. Accept this by pressing Return and you
are invited to trace the outline of the area for
pipe 1.000.
Move the crosshairs to location 15,495 and click with the left hand mouse
button. Next, click location 130,495. DrawNet(CAD) draws a line between
the two points chosen.
Now move to 50,460 and click there. Click the right hand mouse button and
select the Close option from the menu to close the polygon.
Example 12
Page 12.15
DrawNet(CAD) defines the area with a green line, but also calculates
automatically the gross area enclosed by the polygon and applies the PIMP %
(100) to calculate the Impermeable Area. The PIMP value can then be
changed via the DrawNet Properties box with the Area selected.
Note: Although it is important to put the start and endpoints of each
pipeline in the correct place, it is not important to trace the area to a high
level of accuracy. This is because the area will be divided by 10,000 to
convert it into hectares. Therefore, an accuracy of less than 10m2 is
insignificant when it comes to calculating the pipe diameters.
Repeat the Define Areas command and select pipe 1.001 but this time select
Classification as the PIMP Type. You can now select the Roof Classification
by click on it or entering 1 at the command prompt.
Page 12.16
Example 12
Trace the roof area using the following co-ordinates:

95.450 , 478.950
100.150 , 484.800
117.450 , 470.800
112.750 , 465.000
After defining the last co-ordinate, select New from the right hand mouse
button menu. The default PIMP Type value will now be Classification,
accept this and then choose the Road Classification.
We are now going to trace the road area near the houses that we have just
traced. Trace the driveways of these houses using the following co-ordinates:
95.450 , 478.950
113.000 , 465.000
105.000 , 455.000
90.000 , 470.000
After defining the last co-ordinate, select New from the right hand mouse
button menu, accept Classification once more and select the Grass
Classification.
Finally trace out the grassed area behind the houses at the following coordinates:
100.150 , 485.800
115.000 , 500.000
135.000 , 480.000
120.000 , 470.000
Example 12
Page 12.17
After clicking on the last co-ordinate, select Close from the right hand mouse
button menu. You will see that each of the areas now follows the colour
selected for the PIMP Classification. If you do not see the hatches these can
be turned on via the Display Settings.
Click on the Area Summary button in the Results menu and DrawNet(CAD)
will display a summary of all the areas defined.
To complete this process, define a single User area for pipe 2.000, using the
following co-ordinates:
50.000 , 460.000
110.000 , 420.000
70.000 , 390.000
40.000 , 410.000
After clicking on the last co-ordinate, select Close from the right hand mouse
button menu.
Page 12.18
Example 12
Amending and editing data
A major benefit of DrawNet(CAD) is the speed and ease with which the
network design can be altered. The following exercises demonstrate these
procedures.
Renumbering pipes
DrawNet(CAD) has its own automatic renumbering facility. This allows it to

renumber the entire network by interrogating the database.
To demonstrate this function select the Renumber Network option from the
Network menu.
DrawNet(CAD) will automatically renumber the network starting at the

indicated Main Line number with the Value set as below
The network is renumbered as shown below.
Example 12
Page 12.19
The renumbering process is a very important facility as it provides a

continuity check on the upstream and downstream ends of every pipe in the
system.
In a real project, before you end the drawing, or attempt to enter Micro
Drainage from the drawing, it is essential that you use DrawNet(CAD) to
carry out a successful renumber.
Repeat the renumber, choosing pipe 56.000 as the starting pipe and enter 1 as
the starting pipe number.
Outfall Details
Open the Outfall Details from the Network menu. The Outfall IL is currently
very deep in the ground. We will solve this when we have examined the
Network Details. Enter the outfall name and manhole diameter as shown
below then click OK.
Network Details
To view the Network Details select the Network Details commands from the
Network Menu. This will display the same Network Details form as you may
be familiar with from System1.
Examination of the spreadsheet will give you a series of warnings about
cover levels, culminating with the warning that the cover to the preceding
pipe is greater than 2.4. You can ignore all of these warnings, since Optimise
will take care of the cover to the system. However, take a look at the
Longsection to see the nature of the problem.
Page 12.20
Example 12
To complete the design of the system, click on the Optimise button and say
Yes to the Optimise message that appears. Storm automatically re-designs the
system.
Optimise
Clicking the Longsection button will show you the re-designed system. The
Auto Design options are only shown if A.P.T is installed.
Switching to Micro Drainage
DrawNet(CAD) provides an automatic link to Micro Drainage to enable you

to analyse the network. In this example we have assumed that Micro
Drainage is running on the same machine as DrawNet(CAD), or that you
have access to it via a network.
Note: If you do not have Micro Drainage installed, you will need to take
the Storm.mdx file and transfer it to the machine, which Micro Drainage is
running on.
Writing to Micro Drainage
From the DrawNet(CAD) menu, select Save from the Site menu option. This
will display the Save File dialogue. You need to specify a File name and a
location to save the file. In this example we have used the filename
Storm.mdx.
Example 12
Page 12.21
Running Network
We will now launch to Network to perform a hydrographic analysis of the

file with the Simulation module. To do this open the Module Selector from
the Help/About menu, click on the Network icon and the software will be
opened as a new window.
Note: If you are not familiar with switching modules please see How Do I
Use the Module Selector for more information.
At Open Dialog locate and load in the Storm.mdx file we saved previously.
Then open Simulation Criteria from the Site menu, enter 30 for the Return
Period and accept the remaining default values by clicking OK.
Before proceeding to analyse the network, set an on-line control. To do this,
select Online Controls from the Network menu or click on the Online
Controls icon.
Online Controls
Enter the control as shown below:
Page 12.22
Example 12
You will need to enter the value of 0.150 for the orifice diameter. Click OK
to close the form.
Analysis
Now run the analysis At Fine time step and save the data. Your data will be
similar to those shown here.
Reading from Micro Drainage
To complete the tasks within Micro Drainage, select Save from the File
menu. Then exit Network and return to AutoCAD.
Opening the Network file
Choose Load Drainage Design option from the Site menu. The Open File
dialogue box will appear. Simply select the Storm.mdx file and select Open
to load your network file into AutoCAD. You will be warned that the
Drawing already contains DrawNet(CAD) data, please say Yes to the
message to overwrite the old data.
Results of the analysis can be viewed in DrawNet(CAD) by opening the
Simulation Summary from the Results menu.
Simulation Flags
You will see DrawNet(CAD) redraw the network, however at this stage no
changes will be apparent as we did not make any changes to the layout in
Network. However we can now turn on Simulation Flags to indicate the
result within the Drawing. To do this open the Display Settings from the
Graphics menu and toggle the Show Sim Flags option on in the Network
Settings tab.
Example 12
Page 12.23
The colour coding follows the colours on the Status tab of the Display
Settings, but by default they are coloured as:
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Blue
OK
Surcharged
Flood Risk
Flood
Viewing Simulation Data
Return to the DrawNet(CAD) menu and choose Display DrawNet Properties

from the Create/Edit menu. You can click on a Pipe or Manhole DrawNet
entity, select the Simulation Data tab to view the Simulation attributes for the
chosen pipe. The sample here shows the Simulation Data for pipe S1.001.
Page 12.24
Example 12
Longsections
From the Graphics menu we will next choose the Plot Longsection option.
DrawNet(CAD) will display the Plot dialogue box .
The Plot Designer can be used to display different variables on the
Longsection to suit the job requirements.
For this example, use the pick buttons to select the starting pipe 1.000 and the
last length to be pipe 1.003.
Enter the Horizontal / Vertical Scale as shown. In a real project, you could
select whichever value is appropriate.
Example 12
Page 12.25
You can now plot this longsection by clicking OK.
To return to the network close the current drawing by selecting Close from
AutoCADs File menu.
You have now completed this part of the example. If you simply quit from
AutoCAD, you should ensure that the example file is saved in its original
format. If you want to save your work without altering the original, use the
Save As command and enter the name of your choice.
Page 12.26
Example 12
Redesigning the display
DrawNet(CAD) allows you to present the display in a variety of forms. This

exercise will introduce you to the controls so that in future you can tailor the
presentation of the drawings to suit your own preferences.
Select the Display Settings options from the Graphics menu and the
DrawNet(CAD) Display Settings dialogue box appears.
Change the Pipe Text Colour to Blue and click the Apply button to update the
screen display.
The Pipe Prefix can be changed to PN on the Network Manager form in the
Site menu.
Trial and error with the variables will help you to find your preferred
combination of options.
Example 12
Page 12.27
Pipe Crossing and Conflict Detection
DrawNet(CAD) enables you to identify instances where network designs

conflict with one another. To experiment with this facility, we must first load
the Foul file that contains the network that clashes with the existing Storm
network.
From the Site menu open the Network Manager and select the Import button.
Select the file Foul.mdx file to load and import the network as New Network
when prompted.
In the Network Manager the Storm and Foul networks are listed with the
Foul network highlighted light blue to indicate it is the current network.
The Storm and Foul networks cross at Pipes 1.000 and Pipe 2.000.
Page 12.28
Example 12
To examine this more closely choose Crossings and Conflicts from the Site
menu.
Networks can be included or supressed in Crossing and Conflict detection by

selecting or de-selecting from the Crossing and Conflict Filter. Separation
values for determining crossings and conflicts can also be specified.
Example 13
Page 13.1

Example 13 - DrawNet
Graphical Model Build
Page 13.2
Example 13
Introduction
DrawNet allows multiple networks to be defined through a fully interactive

graphical interface. It allows Storm, Foul and, with A.P.T., Existing networks
to be designed on a single drawing. Storm and Existing networks may be
exported to the Simulation module for full hydraulic testing. The following
example represents a typical process of using DrawNet to produce drawings
and design networks.
Select the Start button and open the Micro Drainage 2014 menu from within
the Programs menu and select Network.
Once Network has loaded, the program will prompt the following:
Click on New Storm.

You will now be presented with the Design Criteria screen. Enter the data as
shown overleaf and click OK.
Example 13
Page 13.3
Terrain Modelling
As the design is carried out graphically in DrawNet the Plan view will
automatically be loaded.
A DXF or DWG drawing file can be loaded onto the drawing. Click the Load
DXF button to load in a CAD file.
Load DXF
Click the Load button on the Import CAD Drawing form and open the
Example13.dxf file from the \Micro Drainage 2014\Data directory.
DrawNet supports two full terrain models. Proposed represents design or
built levels; these are the same as the cover levels normally entered in System
1. Existing levels are those on-site before development commences.
When APT is present DrawNet can extract cover level data from AutoCAD
DXF and DWG files to generate either of the two terrain models. The
example can still be completed if APT is not present as manual entry of cover
levels is explained later.
Page 13.4
Example 13
The CAD file and data will be loaded into the form. Tick the box to include
Site Survey Data as Proposed and Existing but not Image, set it to Simple
Cover and click OK.
The CAD file will be loaded onto the Plan view with the correct co-ordinates
and the ground data contained within the DXF will automatically be
triangulated. Turn off the TIN from the View Options dropdown.
Example 13
Page 13.5
The file also contains a proposed road layout for the site, which will be used
to design the preliminary drainage layout. Click the 3D WorldView button to
view the ground profile in 3D.
3D WorldView
A full 3D ground profile is generated. Make sure the Ground Overlay On
Ground option is ticked under the View tab and the Show TIN Ground option
is ticked under the Model tab. Under the Model tab increase the Overlay
Detail to 1024 and reduce the Horizontal Compression to 5:1.
Close the 3D to return to the Plan view. To make the road layout clearer to
work with, turn off GIS Ground options from the View Options dropdown
toolbar.
Page 13.6
Example 13
Draw Network
From the toolbar click on the Toolbox button to load the drawing Toolbox.
Toolbox
Right click anywhere on the Plan view and select the Band Zoom option
from the pop-up menu.
Left click with the mouse just to the top left of the drawing and drag a
window over the drawing as shown.
From the Toolbox select the Define Straight Pipes option.

Define Straight Pipes
Move the mouse over the drawing and a hand with a cross hair will appear.
Before drawing the network turn on the DXF Snap and Optimise options.
DXF Snap
Optimise On
Example 13
Page 13.7
In this example manhole positions are included in the CAD drawing and
should be retained, although manholes can be positioned freehand if required.
Move the hand over the proposed manhole position at the bottom left of the
drawing and a blue square appears as the mouse snaps to the manhole
location. Left click with the mouse to start drawing the network.
Proceed down the road to the next proposed manhole position and the square
will appear again. Left click with the mouse to draw the first pipe.
Continue down the road clicking on each manhole location and turn left to
the outfall at the end of the road. Right click with the mouse to end the main
run.
From the Toolbox click the Select button and a cross hair will appear.
Select
Move the cross hair over the last pipe until the Pipe S1.012 pop-up appears
and left click on it so it is highlighted red.
Open the Longsections from the Graphics menu. Optimise has automatically
designed the pipes to the ground profile.
Return to the Plan view.
Page 13.8
Example 13
To add a branch line to the network select the Band Zoom option as before
and draw a window as shown.
Select Define Straight Pipes from the Toolbox and move the hand to the top
manhole. Draw the pipes for the branch line and left click on Manhole S8 to
join it to the main line.
Note: Manholes can be renumbered using the Renumber Manholes button
on the bottom toolbar.
Click the Extents button to view the whole network.
Extents
Adding Areas
To add contributing areas to each manhole select the Define Areas button
from the Toolbox. Move the mouse over the drawing and a bullseye will
appear.
Define Areas
Move the bullseye over Manhole S1 and left click.
Example 13
Page 13.9
The hand and cross hair will appear. Move the hand to the far left of the area
contributing as shown and left click with the mouse.
Trace around the area in a clockwise direction to the point shown below.
Right click to close the area. Left click anywhere on the screen and the area
will be shown in green.
Page 13.10
Example 13
Click the Select button on the Toolbox and Left click on the area so it turns
red. Then Right click on the area and choose Properties.
Properties
The Properties form will appear showing all the details for the selected area.
Set the Transparency (%) to 100.

Note: A Paved Area Factor can also be specified at this point, which will be
applied to each area as it is added.
Draw around the area contributing to the branch line in the same way as
before adding it to Manhole S8 (upstream of pipe S2.000) and set the
Transparency (%) to 100.
As the areas are added the network is recalculated and updated pipe sizes are
shown on the longsection.
Example 13
Page 13.11
Return to the Plan view.
Flow Controls
From the Toolbox click the Select button and left click on pipe S1.012 (so it
is highlighted red). Then right click and select Properties to show all the
information for pipe S1.012.
Scroll down to the bottom of the Properties. The flow for pipe S1.012 is
110.8 l/s, which is too high as there is a discharge consent of 20 l/s off site.
DrawNet allows a flow control to be specified. This facility will reduce the
flow to the required discharge and allow System 1 to reduce pipes
downstream.
Enter 20 l/s in the Design Flow (l/s) cell and press the Enter key on the
keyboard.
Note: Specifying a flow control is only available if APT present.
Although the flow for pipe S1.012 has been overruled the program will not
specify a pipe diameter smaller than the pipe immediately upstream. To
downsize the pipe, the diameter must be specified manually.
Note: The control must be specified in detail in Simulation as a constant
flow specification is not sufficient for a full analysis.
Page 13.12
Example 13
Network Details
The network can still be viewed in spreadsheet format if required. Select

Network Details from the Network menu. Specify a diameter of 150mm for
pipe 1.012. It is displayed in red to show it is user specified.
If the Design Flow (l/s) column is not present it can be turned on by

selecting Preferences from the Network Details toolbar.
If APT is not present, cover levels can be entered on the Network Details
spreadsheet or on the Manhole Properties form.
Click the Plan button to return to the graphical view.
Plan
Reopen the toolbox and select Define Ancillaries Annotation.
Define Ancillaries Annotation
Select Manhole S13 with the bullseye and a box will appear with the Design
Flow information.
Example 13
Page 13.13
Choose the Select button from the toolbox. Right click on the Design Flow
box and select Properties and untick the Locked option and close the
Properties window. You may now drag the Design Flow box to a more
suitable location.
Multiple Networks
Multiple networks can be designed in DrawNet. To add an additional

network to the drawing click the Network Manager button.
Network Manager
The Network Manager form allows additional Storm, Foul and Existing
networks to be added to the drawing. Click the New Network drop down
arrow and select New Foul - Main Network to add a foul network. The
Design Criteria will appear for Foul - Main.
New Network
Page 13.14
Example 13
Enter the data as shown and click OK.
Right click anywhere on the plan and select the Band Zoom option. Band a
window around the top end of the site as shown and turn off the DXF Snap
option.
Open the Toolbox by clicking the Toolbox button and select the Define
Straight Pipes option.
Example 13
Page 13.15
Draw the Foul network freehand outside the verge line and right click at the
end to finish. The main line of the Foul network will be designed.
Add a branch line to the foul network crossing the road.
DrawNet will identify any crossings that occur between networks. Select
Page 13.16
Example 13
Crossings and Conflicts from the Site menu and a red circle denotes pipe
crossings along with the Crossings / Clashes form, giving pipe and level
information.
Open the 3D World View to see the crossings visually.
Landscape Features
Close the 3D to return to the drawing and turn the DXF Snap back on. Select
the Define Landscape Features button on the Toolbox, which allows houses
and other elements to be added to the drawing. Set the Quick Data value to
7.5. This will be applied to the height of each house as it is defined.
Example 13
Page 13.17
The house locations are already on the drawing. To define a house click on 3
of the corner points. The house will be drawn over the original layout on the
drawing.
Note: Landscaping Features are only available if APT present.

Add the three other houses to the drawing in the same way and open the 3D
World View to see the houses in 3D.
Modifying the Drawing
Additional manholes can be inserted anywhere in the network. Close the 3D

view to return to the drawing and click the Extents button.
Select the Insert Manhole option on the Toolbox.
Insert Manhole
Move the bullseye to midway along pipe S2.002 and left click with the
mouse.
Page 13.18
Example 13
An additional manhole will be added and the network renumbers

automatically.
Open the Display Settings form by clicking the button on the toolbar.
Display Settings
The Display Settings allows each layer to be locked (to stop selection or
inadvertent modification) or the default drawing colour to be specified. All
applies the selected colour to all existing layer entities and Del deletes the
layer. Change the Annotation colour to red (so it is visible on print outs).
Set up the Display Settings as shown below to allow selection and movement
of the outfall manhole (see Outfall below).
Example 13
Page 13.19
The outfall manhole can now be moved to any position on the drawing. Click
the Select button on the Toolbox and position the cross hair over the outfall
manhole and Left click. Drag the manhole to a new position on the drawing.
Before continuing move the outfall manhole back to its correct position.
Close the Display Settings form and click the Annotation Settings button.
Annotation Settings
By default the drawing displays Pipe Numbers and Manhole Numbers only.
Additional data can be added to the drawing by modifying the Annotation

Settings.
Page 13.20
Example 13
Right clicking anywhere on the drawing displays a pop-up menu, which

allows any of the forms to be opened instead of selecting them from the
toolbar.
There is also the Pan option, which allows panning by clicking the central
scroll button on your mouse and zooming by scrolling the button.
Example 13
Page 13.21
A second terrain model
The preliminary design for the Road drainage is now complete.

True ground levels for the road and verges are available in a digital terrain
model which can be imported over the top of the original DXF file. To do
this select GIS Data from the Site menu.
Note: Importing a Terrain model is only available if APT present.
On the GIS Data form select the Surfaces Tab and then Proposed from the
drop down. Select the Import button from the toolbar. At the Open File
prompt change the file type to .pwf, select the Example13.pwf file and say
Yes to the warnings. Select OK to the GIS data form and say Yes to the
warning.
The new digital terrain data will be loaded, replacing the existing
information. The longsection automatically updates to show the new ground /
road levels and the system is automatically optimised.
View the 3D (making sure the Show TIN Ground option is turned on under
the Model tab) to see the site with the true levels. Again you can switch
between existing and proposed ground levels using the dropdown.
Page 13.22
Example 13
Plotting
Close the 3D and click the Print Preview button.

Print Preview
Turn off the TIN and GIS Ground from under the View Options dropdown
toolbar.
From the File menu select Page Setup, change the Orientation to Landscape
and click OK. From the View Options menu make sure Graphics is turned
on.
Right click on the drawing and select Set Print Scale.
Enter a Print Scale (1:X) of 1500 and select OK. Close the properties form
and right click on the drawing and select Pan. A Hand will appear allowing
the drawing to be dragged into the centre of the print preview.
To use standard SFA5 colours and line styles select the SFA option from the
Pipe Colours and Manhole Colours dropdown.
Example 13
Page 13.23
Clicking the Plot Image button will send the final layout to a printer or
plotter.
Plot Image
The final drawing may be output and merged with the original DXF drawing
for export to CAD facilities by clicking the Save DXF button.
Save DXF
This provides a seamless integration with CAD systems.
All items that have a level associated with them will have this represented as
an elevation(s) associated with the 2D entity. i.e. Invert Levels on Manholes
and US and DS IL for Pipes. Levels will also be appended to TIN Data and
FloodFlow results if present.
Page 13.24
Example 13
and US and DS IL for Pipes. Levels will also be appended to TIN Data and
FloodFlow results if present.
To assist with Building Information Modelling (BIM) a switch is in place that
allows 3D Network entities to be exported with the DrawNet module. When
this option is selected the following will occur:
Pipes - Exported as Cylinder for standard pipe based on diameter or

as a series of faces to represent Conduits and Section Types
Manholes - Exported as a Cylinder for circular manholes or a Box for
Square manholes, both based on dimension and drawn from Cover
Level down to manhole base.
Example 14
Page 14.1

Example 14 FloodFlow
Overland Flow Path Analysis
Page 14.2
Example 14
Introduction
The terms Exceedence and Risk have become more common in

engineering specifications in recent years. While engineers have been
concentrating on the underground (minor) system for many years, we must
also assess the performance of the above ground (major) system. The major
system can take many forms, including the careful design of landscaping to
ensure that the risks to property and life are reduced.
FloodFlow is a 2D analysis engine that can generate overland flood flow
paths. When used in conjunction with Simulation APT it provides minuteby-minute flood depths, directions and velocities. This allows a full
assessment of the risk associated with the flooding generated during extreme
events. Dynamic FloodFlow Analysis can link the major and minor systems
together in one analysis run, providing fully integrated 1D and 2D analysis
for the first time.
When used with DrawNet APT the FloodFlow methods provide a powerful
design aid. The geometric analysis tools allow sink points and ridgelines to
be identified on the ground surface at the click of a button. This makes
planning the location of terminal gullies and overland flow corridors a simple
task. A FloodFlow analysis can also be carried out using a constant water
depth across the entire site. The main overland flow routes can then be
identified at the very start of the design process.
Using Simulation and FloodFlow Analysis engines, it is possible to apply
rainfall directly to the terrain model removing the need to identify catchment
areas for specific manholes as the rainfall will find its own way into the 1D
model. In combination with DrawNet the terrain model can be zoned, with
each zone allowing rural and urban areas to be distinguished, each with its
own runoff coefficient.
The following example takes the design from Example 13 and demonstrates
the use of FloodFlow to identify the risks associated with overland flows.
Example 14
Page 14.3
FloodFlow within DrawNet APT
Open Network using your preferred method. At the Open screen select Open
Existing File. Locate the .mdx file saved at the end of Example 13.
Alternatively, load Example14.mdx from the \Micro Drainage 2014\Data
directory.
This should then automatically present you with the Plan. Select the Proposed
view using the drop down in the bottom left hand corner.
The ability to perform a FloodFlow analysis at an early design stage helps to
prevent the need for major modifications to the drainage network and/or
landscaping at a later time.
We can now run FloodFlow to identify sink points, ridgelines and likely
overland flow routes.
Right click on the Drawing background and select Band Zoom. Left Click
and Drag a box around the houses and cul-de-sac at the southern end of the
site.
Click on the View Options drop down menu and click the TIN Analysis icon.
View Options
TIN Analysis
Each triangle in the DTM will now display an arrow, or red cross, to show
the direction of steepest ground slope. These arrows are colour coded to
represent the gradient. The display settings gives a key of the colours and
symbols used.
Page 14.4
Example 14
Ridgelines are identified where the surrounding triangles are sloping away
from the line. These are marked with a thick black and white line, and can be
seen along the centre line of the road, as well as along the kerb lines.
A sink point is identified where a vertex is lower than all of the surrounding
vertices. Sink points are marked on the drawing by a black cross inside a
solid red circle. The engineer would need to ensure that additional gullies are
considered for these locations, to prevent ponding of surface water.
The TIN Analysis can also be viewed in 3D; the same arrows and symbols
are overlaid on the terrain surface.
Example 14
Page 14.5
Click the 3D World View icon and turn on the TIN Analysis from the View
Options menu.
Close the 3D World View to return to the drawing. Open the View Options
menu and turn off the TIN Analysis. A full FloodFlow analysis can be
carried out in DrawNet by applying a starting water depth to the whole
drawing.
Click the FloodFlow Analysis icon on the lower toolbar and the FloodFlow
Analysis Options are displayed. Set the Grid Size to 2m, the water depth to
50 mm and the analysis time to 60 minutes and click OK to accept the rest of
the default values. This will apply 50 mm of rainfall across the entire TIN
and allow it to flow for 60 minutes.
FloodFlow Analysis
Note: In DrawNet the FloodFlow analysis is only performed on the section
of the Drawing that is currently displayed.
DrawNet now displays the peak flood depths and Velocity-Depths for each
grid square. The colour coding is the same as FloodFlow in Simulation. The
results are used to validate the TIN Analysis.
Page 14.6
Example 14
To view the results of the FloodFlow analysis, turn on FloodFlow Depth and
FloodFlow Velocity from the View Options menu.
FloodFlow Depth
FloodFlow Velocity
To user define the graphical results open the Display Settings and select
FloodFlow Colours.
Display Settings
By default squares are transparent until the water is 10mm deep. 10 to

100mm is coloured blue. 100mm to 300mm is coloured red. 300mm to
600mm is coloured yellow. Above 600mm the squares are white.
Each of the colours becomes lighter as the depth approaches the upper end of
the range. Click on any colour and the Colour Picker is displayed.
Each square in the terrain grid containing more than the minimum depth of
water displays an arrow showing the direction of flow. The arrow is coloured
depending on the product of velocity and depth. By default 0-0.1 (m2/s) is
blue. 0.1-0.2 is red and 0.2 to 0.3 is gold. Above 0.3 the arrow is grey.
Again each of these can be edited.
The exact values of the Flood Depth and the Velocity-Depth are shown at the
bottom right of the Plan. Hover the cursor over a flooded grid square to view
these values.
Example 14
Page 14.7
Select the FloodFlow Settings tab.

Semi-transparent depth on Plan enables an aerial photograph or other
background image to be seen behind the FloodFlow depth squares. As we
will not be using a background image deselect the option.
We will leave Show continuous surface ticked on. This will apply the grid
level at the centre of each grid square and the level linearly interpolated in
between rather than show each square individually. If working with a model
with sharp details (i.e. break lines) you may want to deselect this option.
You can also specify maximum number of grid squares that will be displayed
along either of the axis for the Plan/3D Level of Detail (LOD). The value
should be set to gives a suitable performance level on your PC.
Close the Display Settings and view the Plan, the outline of the maximum
flood levels is displayed.
Page 14.8
Example 14
FloodFlow within Simulation APT
A 100 year 15 minute winter storm has been chosen, with 30% Additional
Flow for climate change. Set the Simulation Criteria as shown.
Note: To identify the storms that produce flooding, the Seasonal Return
Period Wizard should be run. Please see Example 8 for details.
Click OK to the Simulation Criteria and run the analysis by clicking the Go
button.
Run Analysis
The Summary of Results show that this event causes flooding at four nodes
in the network. FloodFlow can now be used to identify the flow pathways
that this flooding will follow.
Click on the Analyse menu and select the FloodFlow Analysis option.
Example 14
Page 14.9
The FloodFlow Analysis Options are displayed.
The Analysis Method can be set to either Explicit or ADI (Alternate

Direction Implicit). For this example we will leave it set to ADI and we will
leave the Analysis Speed set to Medium. For more information on Analysis
Methods, click on the Help button.
The Grid Size defaults to 4m. In this case we are looking at flooding on a
road that is around 5.5m wide. Change the Grid Size to 2m and set the
Surface as Urban.
Page 14.10
Example 14
There are three FloodFlow Analysis Type choices that can be selected from
the dropdown option. The first, FloodFlow Static Analysis, uses the results
of our Simulation analysis to generate the overland flow routes. This method
retains all floodwater above ground.
The second method, FloodFlow Dynamic Analysis, links the minor and
major systems, allowing floodwater to re-enter the underground drainage
network if spare capacity is available. In this case our pipe network is below
a road, so it is likely that flood water will be able to re-enter the network.
The third method, Apply Rainfall, applies the rainfall directly to the terrain
model. The water is then free to find its own way into the underground
drainage network. Cv values can be defined for different surface zones. This
method will eliminate the need to specify catchment areas for each manhole.
Select Dynamic Analysis and leave the 1D Timestep as Fine and click OK to
start the analysis.
Once the analysis has finished click Save and the Summary of Results is
displayed.
The Summary shows that additional pipes are now showing a Flood warning.
This is because the Dynamic Analysis has fed some of the floodwater back
into the underground system, causing additional flooding downstream.
Click on the Plan icon to view this graphically.
Plan
The Plan shows the triangulated Digital Terrain Model and the locations of
the houses added in DrawNet. If these are not shown, ensure that the TIN
and GIS Features options are turned on under the View Options menu.
Example 14
Page 14.11
To view the results of the FloodFlow analysis, turn on FloodFlow Depth and
FloodFlow Velocity from the View Options menu.
Zoom in on the housing area to see the impact of the flooding.
To view minute-by-minute flood levels, click on the Play button on the Video
Controller.
Page 14.12
Example 14
In this example it can be seen that all depths are less than 300 mm and that
the Velocity Depth vector never exceeds 0.1 m2/s. However, the proximity
of the flooding to one of the houses may be a problem; we should look at
altering the site layout or levels to mitigate this risk.
The nature of the risk is more apparent when viewed in 3D. Click on the 3D
World View icon and select the Play button to animate the flooding.
Apply Rainfall
FloodFlow allows the engineers to escape the confines of defining areas for
each manhole node. Instead you can apply rainfall directly to terrain model
and allow it to find its own way into the 1D model (all contributing areas are
ignored). The DTM can be zoned to apply specific runoff (CV) rates for
different surface types. Furthermore, areas that fall outside of the site you are
interested in analysing can be excluded to increase analysis speed.
To zone your site, select the plan view and open the Toolbox from the
toolbar.
Toolbox
Example 14
Page 14.13
Select the Misc. tab and click at the FloodFlow Zone button (only available
with the DrawNet module).
FloodFlow Zone
The hand and cross hair will appear. Trace freehand around the impermeable
area by left clicking with the mouse at each point.
Click the Select button on the Toolbox and left click on the area so it turns
red. Then Right click on the area and choose Properties.
The Properties form allows you to select Surface Type, set it to Urban.
Note: FloodFlow modelling using the Apply Rainfall Analysis type
requires the DrawNet module to zone your site.
Click the FloodFlow Exclude Zone button.
FloodFlow Exclude
Exclude the section of the site that has no affect on the housing and roads by
drawing around it using the same method as before. No runoff will contribute
from the excluded zone.
Page 14.14
Example 14
Select FloodFlow Analysis from the Analyse menu.
Set the Analysis Type as Apply Rainfall and all the other variables as shown
above. Here note that the Cv value used is a combination of the Volumetric
Runoff Coefficient and the percentage impervious for the zoned area. Make
sure Apply Exclusions option is selected and click OK to run the analysis.
The results further corroborate the initial TIN Analysis by identifying the
same sink points and ridgelines.
Example 14
Page 14.15
Open the Display Settings and select FloodFlow Colours.
Set the first depth increment to 20. Water depths less then 20mm will now
not be drawn.
To further aid detailed result analysis and visualisation process. It is possible

to generate a cross-section of the result through drawing a polyline for
analysing specific flooding locations. Select the FloodFlow Profile option
from the Toolbox.
Page 14.16
Example 14
FloodFlow Profile
More detail is required on the road outside the houses. Left click with the
mouse to drag the polyline across the road, then left click again and then
immediately right click to display the result.
The results are can been seen as both graphical and tabular. This allows the
engineer to closely inspect specific hazardous locations in you flooded area.
Click the 3D World View icon and use the Compass to view the results in the
3D View.
Example 15
Page 15.1

Example 15 Pluvius
Use of Extended Time Series Rainfall
Page 15.2
Example 15
Introduction
Pluvius is a complete suite of rainfall data management and analysis
resources, designed to overcome the difficulties previously associated with
obtaining and using extended rainfall records.
The first challenge is the question of access to good quality data. Hourly and
sub-hourly records represent the most important data for pluvial flooding
(flooding caused by rainfall) in urban areas. Pluvius uses the Met Office
DELUGE database, containing over 700 years worth of rainfall data,
recorded at five-minute intervals on 73 sites across the UK. The data was
obtained from a single source, the Met Office, using tilting bucket rain
gauges and quality controlled against nearby daily check gauges.
In addition to the Met Office's quality controlled data, the Pluvius toolkit
includes the facility for the user to augment this data with their own rain
gauge records.
Secondly, there is the difficulty of data handling. Pluvius is a state of the art
database capable of accessing and analysing huge records very quickly.
It can also be difficult to make sense of so much information. Pluvius
incorporates a wide range of analytical and sorting tools to help extract the
important data and to validate it. Engineers can therefore pool long rainfall
records spanning hundreds of years at any location in the UK. All the events
from that record can be extracted, allowing the engineer to identify the most
important of them from a drainage perspective, and generate typical years or
typical seasons from the record.
While there are many potential applications for the data generated by Pluvius,
the following example illustrates how this data may be applied to a typical
urban drainage scenario.
Example 15
Page 15.3
The Design Problem
The site being analysed is close to the confluence of a river and its tributary.
A 3D representation of this is shown below.
The pipe network has been sized and tested using design storms. However,
the system performance must be assessed against a 30 year return period
event. Due to the nature of the site, the event return period is not dependent
upon the rainfall return period alone. Antecedent (ground) wetness and the
water level in the river will also have a large effect. A conservative
assumption of a high water level in the river, and a high runoff percentage,
may provide a solution to this problem. However, this approach is likely to
lead to an over engineered and costly solution, with a very low joint
probability.
To generate the true 30 year return period with confidence, we require up to
300 years of extended time series rainfall, centred on our site location (the
record should be 5 to 10 times the desired return period). We also require
this data to be at a short enough time step to be applicable to the urban
environment.
This example demonstrates how the statistical techniques employed within
Pluvius can be used to generate these records, and how this data can then be
used to assess the performance of a drainage system.
Page 15.4
Example 15
Loading Pluvius
Open Pluvius using your preferred method. Once Pluvius has loaded, the
Welcome screen is presented.
Moving the mouse cursor over each icon displays a description of the
options. Click the Gauge Manager (top) icon. Here you will find details of
all 73 gauges contained within Pluvius' default database. The Gauge
Manager also allows the addition of extra gauges and rainfall data. For more
information on the Gauge Manager, please see the Rainfall Database section
of MDHelp.
Close the Gauge Manager and proceed to select the Generate Localised
Rainfall (lower) option from the Welcome screen.
Example 15
Page 15.5
Generate Localised Rainfall
The Generate Localised Rainfall Wizard is a six step wizard allowing the
user to tailor the outputs from Pluvius to meet their own demands.
To test our drainage system in this case, we require an extended rainfall
record for our site, along with the most severe rainfall events from the record.
The following steps demonstrate how the outputs from Pluvius can be
tailored to each individual situation.
Step 1: New or Existing
At Step 1 ensure that Create New Analysis is selected, and click the Next
button.
Next
Step 2: Select Location
At Step 2, we must locate our site. Type Newbury into the Name cell, and
click on the Map button. A map of the UK is presented. Use the box in the
top left to locate the South of England and then click a location to the south
of Newbury on the main map. Values similar to those shown below are
loaded. These values can be over-ruled by typing them in manually if
required. Click Next.
Page 15.6
Example 15
Step 3: Confirm Gauges
Step 3 shows the names and locations of the gauges that will be pooled to
generate the extended record.
Gauges can be selected in batches by using the options at the top of the
screen. It is possible to select gauges by the range of their M5-60 values,
their distance from the target site, their Average Annual Rainfall or by
Meteorological Region. In this case, we will select all gauges within the
South East region. Select the Regions check box and choose SE from the
options. Then click the Select button.
26 gauges are now selected, providing a total record length of 274 years.
Scroll through the list to view the full range of gauges selected. Click Next.
Example 15
Page 15.7
Step 4: Start Conditions & Event Settings
Run on Time (mins) / Threshold (mm) During the analysis, Pluvius splits
the record into individual events. Each urban drainage network or catchment
responds differently to rainfall, so the definition of an event can also change.
Pluvius uses the Run on Time and Threshold to define these events in the
following way:
1. From the start of the file, find the first rainfall value that is greater than
the threshold. This is the start time of Event 1.
2. Step through the profile until the rainfall intensity again falls below the
threshold.
3. Step through the next X points in the graph, where X is the Run-On Time.
If any of these points are greater than the threshold, return to step 2 and
continue from this point. If all values lie below the threshold, the end of
the Event has been found. Return to step 1 and start the process again
from this point.
Accept the default values of 360 minutes (6 hours) and 3 mm.
Timestep (mins) The event files are saved using the time step set here.
Accept the default of 5 minutes (5 minutes is the interval used by the Met
Office data; a shorter interval does not improve accuracy).
Main Events per year / Superstorm Length (days) A full explanation of
Superstorms is provided later on in this example. Superstorms are generated
for 0, 1, 2, etc. failures until the number of main events specified has been
produced. The duration of the superstorms is set to the Superstorm Length.
Set Pluvius to generate 2 Main Events per year and accept the default
Superstorm Length of 1 day (the number of main events generated will be
the record length x main events per year: 274 x 2 = 548).
Runoff Conditions A monthly evaporation rate can be set, as well as a
number of other variables used to calculate NAPI values for use with the
New Runoff Equation. The SMD values allow Pluvius to calculate UCWI
and API30 values for each event. In this case, we are not using the New
Runoff Equation, so we can accept the default values. The program will also
output the initial soil moisture content (Cini) for use with the ReFH rainfall
runoff method.
Page 15.8
Example 15
Start Conditions Additional Start Conditions can be entered; Pluvius then

recalculates these values for the start of each new event. In this case, we are
not using these settings. Ensure that the Include Start Conditions check box
is left blank.
Check that the values entered are as shown below and click Next.
Step 5: Seasonal Requirements
Step 5 is used to determine the date range analysed by the program. By

default, the analysis is run on the entire record. In some circumstances, it
may be necessary to exclude certain parts of the record. For instance, a CSO
analysis may only require rainfall data for the Summer Bathing Season.
Analysis of a rainwater harvesting system for a school may require analyses
to be run on each individual school term. Selecting the Summer or Custom
options from this list allow these analyses to be carried out. For this design,
we require analysis of the whole record. Select Annual from the Entire
Record Analysis list.
Pluvius also generates a typical year from the record analysed; this is
explained later on in the example. A typical year can be generated from
statistical analysis of the entire record, or by generating typical quarter years
and combining them together to produce a full year. In this case, we will run
the analysis using full years. Select Annual from the Annual or Quarterly
Typical Year Analysis list, and click Next.
Example 15
Page 15.9
Step 6: Synthetic Rainfall Parameters
The final step in the wizard allows the user to specify which FSR and/or FEH
design storms are produced. Although these files are not required for use in
Micro Drainage, they may be useful for use with other third party packages.
In Pluvius, the synthetic storms generated can be used to validate the data
exported, and to assign a return period to the superstorms generated. Further
discussion of this is provided later on in this example.
We will compare our data with both FSR and FEH design storms. Select the
FSR check box; the M5-60 and Ratio R are automatically populated. Select
FEH and click the button. Select the Newbury.csv file from the
\Pluvius\Data directory. Now click the Finish icon.
Finish
Pluvius now presents a dialogue box asking for a folder into which the results
will be saved. Select an existing location, or create a new folder, and click
OK to run the analysis.
Page 15.10
Example 15
Results
Once the analysis is complete the following results screen is displayed.
The tree diagram on the left hand side provides easy navigation through the
directories produced. Clicking the + buttons expands each directory.
The first directory contains details of the Design Storms produced. Expand
the directory to view the files inside. Selecting a filename displays a graph of
the design storm contained within the file. Close the Design Storms directory
by clicking the - next to it.
Entire Record
Expand the Entire Record directory. This directory is split into four further
sub-directories. Click on All Events and use the Previous and Next buttons
to step through the record one storm at a time. Note that, based on the Event
Settings that we specified, Pluvius has created approximately 20,000
individual events from the 274 year record.
Example 15
Page 15.11
All Events
Click the + button to expand the All Events directory. A .red file has been
produced for each of these events. Clicking on the name of a file displays a
graph of the storm event as shown below.
Superstorms
"The two most important variables for engineering drainage networks are
intensity and volume."
This is the key to generating meaningful design storms for testing networks.
This idea can be applied to very large data sets, consisting of many individual
rainfall files, to produce a single all-encompassing design storm. The Super
Storm is created by strict observance of the underlying principle stated above
- we must preserve the Peak Intensity as well as the total volume of the
storm. Since these are likely to be different for each rainfall file, the worst
cases will be used. In fact, the superstorm is designed to balance volume not
only across the storm as a whole, but also at every sub-duration within the
storm as well.
The theory behind generating the superstorm is available in the Pluvius Help
file. There is also a discussion of superstorm theory in the FAQs.
Page 15.12
Example 15
Close the All Events directory and expand the Superstorms directory. Click
on Super0.red to view the graph.
Super0.red has been built to incorporate all of the worst case events in the
entire record. Theoretically, if a drainage network can contain this storm
without flooding, then it should be able to convey the entire 274 year record.
The superstorm is built from the middle outwards. The 5 minutes around the
centre of the storm represents the worst 5 minutes of rainfall within the entire
record. The average intensity of the 10 minutes around the centre represents
the worst 10 minutes of rainfall in the record. This process is continued until
the entire 24 hour superstorm has been built.
The red and green lines on the graph show the equivalent FSR and FEH
return periods. Note that the return period varies for the different duration
events contained within the superstorm.
Super1.red has been built by discarding the worst case rainfall intensities and
plotting the second worst 5 minutes, second worst 10 minutes, etc. Each
superstorm is referenced by a number in the file name, in this case 1. This
number represents how many times the events used to build the storm were
exceeded within the 274 year record. This number is commonly referred to
as the failure rate, or the number of failures.
Super9.red represents the storms that were exceeded 9 times within the
record (9 failures). As the entire record is 274 years long, this is the event
that is exceeded, on average, once every 30 years. So Super9.red is
equivalent to a 30 year return period design storm built from the real data.
Example 15
Page 15.13
Click on Super9.red.
The graph shows that the FEH return period is consistently between 20 years
and 40 years. This may appear to be a large range, but it represents only a
15% difference in rainfall intensities. Considering the randomness of real
rainfall data, this is a very good result.
Selecting Super27.red displays a Superstorm equivalent to a 10 year return
period; Super137.red is equivalent to the 2 year return period. It can be seen
that the return period shown becomes more and more consistent as the
number of failures is increased.
Page 15.14
Example 15
Main Events
In building the superstorms, Pluvius uses data from files in the All Events
directory. Each of the files that contribute to the superstorm are copied into
the Main Events directory, as it is these events that we are most interested in
when analysing our drainage network.
Click on the - button to close the Superstorms directory and then expand the
Main Events. 548 main events have been generated from this record. Select
some of the Main Event files to view their graphs. These are the rainfall
events that we will simulate with our drainage network later on in the
example.
Example 15
Page 15.15
IDF Tables
Close the Main Events directory and expand the IDF Tables. Now select 15
Min from the list. The POT Analysis graph for 15 minute events is
displayed.
This graph shows rainfall intensity plotted against return period on a log
scale. The blue dots represent 15 minute rainfall events from the rainfall
record. The yellow line is a best-fit line drawn through these points. The red
and green lines show the equivalent FSR and FEH rainfall intensities. The
graph allows us to assess the data set. In this case, there is very good
correlation between the plotted rainfall and the FSR line. In the 180 minute
POT Analysis, shown below, the correlation with the FEH line is very good.
Page 15.16
Example 15
Click on Newbury PT1M5.IDF. The 5 year return period IDF curves from
FSR and FEH are plotted over a bar chart, showing the corresponding rainfall
intensities from the rainfall record. The graph shows that there is a very good
correlation between all three data sets for the 5 year return period.
Newbury PT2M2.IDF shows the 2 year return period IDF data.
Typical Year
Close the IDF Tables and expand the Typical Year directory. Click on the
Annual icon.
To generate the typical year, Pluvius calculates the number of days within
various categories. Firstly, how many days had more than 10mm of rainfall,
then how many had more than 12mm, and so on. The number in each
category is then averaged across the entire record, so that a mean value is
generated. The year with the lowest standard deviation is assumed to be the
typical year.
Example 15
Page 15.17
In this example, the year 1992 is shown to be typical. This is not the actual
year 1992. When combining gauges to produce the continuous record,
Pluvius needs a starting point to date the files. To ensure the output files are
compatible with external software, the year 1801 has been chosen as the start
date for these files. In this case, our record starts in 1801 and finishes in
2074.
The number of dry days in each year is also displayed. Choosing a year with
a high number of dry days may be useful for testing a rainwater harvesting
system.
Expand the Annual directory and the Superstorms directory within it. Click
on Super0.red to view a Superstorm of the typical year. A typical year would
not be expected to contain any extreme rainfall, so we should not expect any
high return periods. All return periods for this Superstorm are around 6 years
or below.
This completes the Pluvius section of the example. We will now take a
selection of the files generated by Pluvius into Simulation APT to test our
drainage network. The tree diagram shown in Pluvius matches the directory
structure output by Pluvius, making it easy to locate the required data.
Page 15.18
Example 15
Simulation
Open Simulation APT using your preferred method. At the Welcome screen,
choose Open Existing File. Select Example15.mdx from the \Pluvius\Data
directory.
Click OK to the Simulation Criteria and click the Plan icon on the main
toolbar to view the network.
Plan
Lines 1, 2 and 3 represent the main river and the tributary. FEH Unit
Hydrographs have been generated at Pipes 1.000 and 3.000 to represent the
flows entering the river and tributary sections. The urban drainage network
enters the river at pipe 4.014.
The network has been analysed with design storms; it passes the 30 year
return period with no on-site flooding. We will now run the main events
through the system.
Rainfall Wizard
Select Rainfall Wizard from the Wizards menu. Ensure the Runoff Details
are set as shown below.
Example 15
Page 15.19
Click Next. Click Add to locate the directory that Pluvius has saved the
results to. Double Click on Entire Record, and then on Main Events. This
will display and select all 548 main event files. You will need to change the
file type to .red to load the files.
Click Next and at Step 3 click Finish to start the analysis. Click OK to the
message stating Unit Hydrographs are present and Yes to the message to
extend runtimes.
Once the analysis is complete, the Summary of Results is presented. Click
the Critical Storm button to view the critical event at each node.
Critical Storm
Event number 18,038 is critical for the majority of the river network; event
number 1,475 is critical for most of the drainage network.
Change the Critical Rank No to 9 to view the 30 year return period event.
Note: This is the 30 year event and not the 30 year storm. This takes into
account the combined probabilities of the rainfall event, the ground
wetness, and the water level in the river.
Page 15.20
Example 15
The results show that the drainage network does not flood for this event.
Similarly, the Critical Rank No can be changed to 27 or 137 to view the 10

and 2 year return periods.
The 100 year Return Period
As we do not have 500-1000 years of rainfall data, we cannot produce the

100 year return period directly. However, we can still produce an
approximation to the 100 year event by applying a growth curve to our 30
year data.
The FSR and FEH growth curves for our site location show that a 1 day
duration, 100 year return period event is around 30% larger than the
corresponding 30 year event. We may also wish to assess the potential
impacts of climate change. If we assume that rainfall intensities may
increase by 30% due to climate change, then the total required increase is
70%.
Super9.red has been shown to correspond to a 30 year return period. Adding
70% to all intensities in this file should approximate to a 100 year event with
an additional 30% for climate change.
Open the Simulation Criteria by clicking the icon, or by selecting Simulation
Example 15
Page 15.21
Criteria from the Site menu. Set the data as shown below, ensuring that an
Additional Flow - % of Total Flow of 70% has been entered.
Change the Rainfall Model to Rainfall Profile and click the Edit button to
open the Rainfall Profile form.
Click the Import icon and locate the Super9.red rainfall file.
Click OK to the Rainfall Profile form, click OK to the Match Rainfall

Profiles to Pipes form after clicking OK to the Simulation Criteria.
Click Go to run the analysis.
The Summary of Results is presented. This shows that the event has caused
Page 15.22
Example 15
flooding in both the river and drainage networks. Scroll through the list of
nodes to see the full extent of the flooding.
To view the impact of this flooding we could run a FloodFlow analysis on the
site. For more information on FloodFlow please see Example 14.
Note: It is possible to run the entire 274 year record if required. This can
be achieved by changing the Rainfall Model to Continuous Analysis in the
Simulation Criteria and then loading all of the event files from the \Entire
Record\All Events directory.
Example 15
Page 15.23
Conclusion
The analysis tools in Pluvius can be used to generate an extended rainfall

record for any location within the UK. In this example, we had the specific
problem of a drainage network discharging to a river. The river levels were
further complicated by the effect of a tributary. The use of Pluvius alongside
the analysis tools of Simulation has allowed us to assess this combination of
problems simultaneously. By analysing the rainfall record, and identifying
the most critical events for our specific problem, we have been able to take
account of the combined probabilities of the rainfall event, the water level in
the river, and the ground wetness. This allows us the confidence that we
have assessed the true 30 year return period event and not just the 30 year
rainfall. As a final check, we have also been able to demonstrate the
magnitude of flooding that a 100 year event may cause.
The outputs generated by Pluvius are not restricted to analysing urban
drainage networks. In fact, due to the quality of the data, a large range of uses
exist, including:
Testing Rainwater Harvesting Systems, using rainfall data generated

for a 'Typical Year'.
Assessing and improving CSO performance, using data generated for

summer bathing seasons.
Validating the performance of design storms for a specific location.
Continuous Analysis of Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDS).
Assessing the effect of drain down times on a systems ability to

contain future events.
Drainage Area Planning.
River Modelling.
Analysis of joint / combined probabilities.
Page 15.24
Example 15
Appendix
Appendix i
Page i.1

Appendix i
Hydraulic Conduits
Page i.2
Appendix i
Introduction
Micro Drainage is supplied with a library comprising 65 hydraulic conduits

that are embedded within it.
You also have the facility to create your own conduit libraries of up to 999
sections. Micro Drainage enables you to select sections from the internal
library or your own libraries from within appropriate modules.
The standard conduits include box culverts, trapezoidal channels, dual
pipelines, triple pipelines, and egg shaped sewers. In addition, Micro
Drainage allows you to create your own section designs when you are
building a library.
Sections can be chosen in the System 1 module by specifying their conduit
number in lieu of a diameter. Full details of the conduits used in any design
are displayed on the hard copy.
Example 2 in this manual incorporates the practical application of the
resources described here.
Specifying sections within System 1
The default hydraulic sections library is automatically loaded every time you
open or create a Storm or Foul network. However, you can have both the
default library and your own hydraulic sections library available
simultaneously. This gives you the choice of specifying sections either from
the default library or your own range, simply by entering the section number.
To do this, simply move the cursor to the pipe diameter field for the pipe you
wish to specify as a conduit. Then click the Conduits button.
Conduits
System 1 presents you with the Conduit Picker, featuring the pre-defined
system conduits under the System tab.
Appendix i
Page i.3
Creating your own conduit Library
To create your own conduit library, select the User tab from the Conduit
Picker.
Then click the Edit button and you will be presented with the Conduit
Designer spreadsheet.
Page i.4
Appendix i
Entering data
Proceed to enter the data set out below, which includes examples of each
kind of section. Start by entering the values shown for the height and
connection height, beginning with 600mm for Section 1.
Micro Drainage gives you a variety of standard shapes to specify for your
section. The toolbar at the left of the spreadsheet provides you with a graphic
representation of the shapes.
Appendix i
Page i.5
Click on each of the labels in turn to see the shapes available.

Then, to apply a rectangular shape with no splay, highlight and
specify the relevant section under Capped and simply click on
the shape button.
The symbol representing the shape you have chosen will appear in the
symbol field of the spreadsheet.
Follow the same process for each different section, observing the points at
which data in addition to the height and connection height are required. You
will note, for instance, that the quadruple pipe section and the egg-shaped
section require no other data to be entered.
Micro Drainage will also make the calculations required by the analysis
modules - such as System 1 or Simulation - for which this library may be
required. Full bore capacities, velocities, volumes and proportional velocities,
capacities and volumes can also be calculated (see below and Example 2).
The physical dimensions entered here must also include connection points
and enough detail for the Simulation module to analyse backwater and
routing though the conduits.
When you have entered all the necessary data the Export button allows you to
save the library so it can be opened for another project.
Save the library as Sample, as shown here.
Page i.6
Appendix i
Similarly the Import button can be used to load existing .sec or .secx files.
Simply click OK to the Conduit Designer and the Conduit Picker window
will now display the User conduits.
The Conduit Picker window will automatically calculate the flow capacity for
your chosen section, using the data from the project on which you are
currently working. Thus you can check that the section has sufficient capacity
before introducing it into the network.
Note: When creating your own .secx file, you may choose to group similar
sections together, leaving gaps in the spreadsheet. However, when Conduit
Picker loads your library it will omit any gaps. Nevertheless, the section
numbers will remain the same.
Appendix i
Page i.7
Entering individual sections
To specify a particular section, you can simply enter the section number in
the Pipe Diameter field of the network spreadsheet. Micro Drainage will not
accept pipe diameters of 65mm or less, so any figure you enter between 1 and
65 will automatically be interpreted as a section from the conduit library.
However, your own library will hold up to 999 sections. To avoid confusion,
with either the conduit library or with a pipe diameter value, you should enter
the section number followed by a minus sign. This instructs the module you
are working in to take the appropriate section from your own library. The
number is shown with the minus sign in the Network Details spreadsheet.
You can also enter sections by highlighting the Pipe Diameter field of your
chosen pipe and clicking the Conduits button. When the Conduit Picker
appears, select the System or User tab and highlight the section you require
and click OK. The section will be entered with the section number shown in
place of a pipe diameter; again, the number will be shown as a negative if
you have chosen a section from the User tab.
A full list of the default conduit library supplied is given later in this
appendix. Descriptive details for the hard copy are also available.
Page i.8
Appendix i
Defining your own sections
You may need to specify a section, which does not conform to the standard
dimensions and patterns supplied. Micro Drainage gives you the resources to
do so.
Begin by highlighting the section number you require for your design. From
the conduit spreadsheet, choose Create from the toolbar of shape options.
Then click Define.
As an example, we will design a benched trapezoidal section.
Enter the coordinates shown in the usual way. Note how the section shape
appears as each line is drawn.
Appendix i
Page i.9
Note also that the dimensions are entered to the nearest millimetre.
Succeeding values cannot be identical for the X (m) coordinates; hence the
need to enter 0.999 and 1.000 for rows 7 and 8 in the Base spreadsheet, even
though it is intended that this side wall should be precisely vertical. For a real
project, you will probably find it helpful to draw a sketch of your section first
and define the coordinates for each point.
With your drawing complete, simply click OK and the section is entered in
the field selected.
Page i.10
Appendix i
Rectangular sections - standard culverts

Section
No.
b
(m)
h
(m)
4*m
(m)
Corner
Splay
A
(m2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1200
1500
1800
1200
1500
1800
2100
1200
1500
1800
2100
2400
1800
2100
2400
2700
1800
2100
2400
2700
2100
2400
2700
3000
3000
600
600
600
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1200
1200
1200
1200
1500
1500
1500
1500
1800
1800
1800
1800
2100
0.833
0.891
0.928
1.002
1.086
1.152
1.201
1.139
1.248
1.340
1.409
1.464
1.502
1.589
1.661
1.726
1.705
1.820
1.916
2.006
2.013
2.132
2.247
2.336
2.563
125x125
125x125
175x175
125x125
125x125
175x175
175x175
125x125
125x125
175x175
175x175
175x175
175x175
175x175
175x175
225x225
175x175
175x175
175x175
225x225
175x175
175x175
225x225
225x225
225x225
0.69
0.87
1.02
0.93
1.17
1.38
1.62
1.17
1.47
1.74
2.04
2.34
2.10
2.46
2.82
3.14
2.64
3.09
3.54
3.95
3.72
4.26
4.76
5.30
6.20
m = hydraulic radius; b = width of culvert section; h = height of culvert section
Appendix i
Page i.11
Trapezoidal sections
A=bh+h2 For maximum efficiency b=0.8284h

Section
No.
b
(m)
h
(m)
m
(m)
4*m
(m)
A
(m2)
26
27
28
29
30
31
0.300
0.375
0.450
0.600
0.800
1.000
0.362
0.453
0.543
0.724
0.966
1.207
0.181
0.2265
0.2715
0.362
0.483
0.6035
0.725
0.906
1.086
1.449
1.932
2.414
0.240
0.375
0.539
0.959
1.706
2.664
A=bh+1.5h2 For maximum efficiency b=0.6056h

Section
No
b
(m)
h
(m)
m
(m)
4*m
(m)
A
(m2)
32
33
34
35
36
0.300
0.375
0.450
0.600
0.800
0.495
0.619
0.743
0.991
1.321
0.2475
0.3095
0.3715
0.4955
0.6605
0.989
1.236
1.484
1.980
2.638
0.512
0.800
1.153
2.051
3.644
Page i.12
Appendix i
Trapezoidal sections - continued
A=bh+2h2 For maximum efficiency b+0.472h

Section
No
b
(m)
h
(m)
m
(m)
4*m
(m)
A
(m2)
37
38
39
40
0.300
0.375
0.450
0.600
0.636
0.794
0.953
1.271
0.318
0.387
0.4765
0.6355
1.270
1.585
1.903
2.538
0.985
1.535
2.211
3.933
Appendix i
Page i.13
Dual Pipelines
Section
No
diameter
(mm)
4*m
(mm)
Area
(m2)
41
42
43
44
45
2 x 300
2x 375
2 x 450
2 x 525
2 x 600
299
375
450
525
599
0.141
0.221
0.318
0.433
0.565
Triple Pipelines
Section
No.
diameter
(mm)
4*m
(mm)
Area
(m2)
46
47
48
49
50
3 x 375
3 x 450
3 x 525
3 x 600
3 x 675
375
450
525
600
675
0.331
0.477
0.649
0.848
1.074
m=hydraulic radius
Page i.14
Appendix i
Egg Shaped Pipes
A=H*H/1.96
B=.667*H
4*m+.7721*H
Section
No.
H
(m)
B
(m)
4*m
(m)
A
(m2)
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
.533
.61
.686
.762
.838
.914
.991
1.067
1.143
1.219
1.372
1.524
1.676
1.829
2.137
.356
.406
.457
.508
.559
.61
.66
.711
.762
.813
.914
1.016
1.118
1.219
1.422
.412
.471
.529
.588
.646
.705
.765
.824
.883
.941
1.058
1.176
1.294
1.412
1.650
.145
.190
.240
.296
.358
.426
.501
.581
.667
.758
.960
1.185
1.433
1.707
2.330
Appendix ii
Page ii.1

Appendix ii
IDF, CRP and Hyetograph
Page ii.2
Appendix ii
IDF
The Rational Method (and its variants) bases its calculations on rainfall data
in the form of Intensity, Duration and Frequency (IDF) data.
IDF libraries are created on the principle that for a given return period (or
frequency) and a set duration, a storm will have a known average intensity.
For example, a storm near Seattle in the USA with a return period of five
years (the frequency) and a duration of 20 minutes, has an average intensity
of 17.5 mm/hr.
The IDF library represents a single frequency and is a sequential list of
average intensities for different durations of storm. In the Rational Method,
each pipe is designed for the average intensity of a storm of a duration equal
to its time of concentration. It could be said, therefore, that each pipe or
channel in a network is designed for a different storm, as each pipe has a
unique time of concentration.
The Rational Method is therefore not suitable for backwater analysis, or any
analysis that involves the effect of one continuous storm, as no two pipes are
designed using the same storm. A Simulation program should be used to
determine the real hydraulic grade lines, which will vary minute by minute
throughout a storm.
Entering IDF data
From within the System 1 module, select Design Criteria from the Network
menu. You will see the option IDF Library listed:
Select this option and click the Load button.

Load
Appendix ii
Page ii.3
The IDF library spreadsheet appears:
Enter the data in the usual way. Where a value is repeated, for instance
towards the end of the storm, simply highlight the value and click Repeat; the
value will automatically be entered into all remaining cells on the
spreadsheet.
Note: Storms of 1, 2 or 5 minute increments (100 entries) are usually used
with Rational Methods, while the IDF series provides sufficient durations
for hydrograph methods.
If you wish to save the IDF library for use with another file, click the Export
icon and you are invited to save the file. Enter a suitable name and the file
can be saved with the extension .idfx or .idf.
Click the Import icon and the Open IDF File window appears which allows
you to load .idfx or .idf files.
Page ii.4
Appendix ii
The example here shows some of the .idfx files supplied as standard with
your Micro Drainage software. Where you have created your own .idfx file,
the name will be shown and you can open it in the usual way.
Click Cancel and when you have entered the data on the previous page, click
OK to use the IDF library with the current design.
The CRP and the hyetograph
To verify the real hydraulic performance of any system during a rainfall

event, a hydrograph method (including Simulation and Source Control) need
more information than the average intensity of a storm and the IDF library is
generally not sufficient for this purpose.
However, if IDF information is all you have, then Micro Drainage provides a
method for producing a storm profile based on this information.
With a Hydrograph method, individual storms are run from start to finish.
The Seattle storm of 17.5 mm/hr average intensity is very unlikely to rain at
exactly 17.5 mm/hr for the whole of the 20 minutes. Most precipitation starts
slowly, peaks near the mid-point of its duration and tails off again. It would
Appendix ii
Page ii.5
not be unusual for a storm to have a peak intensity 4 times the average
intensity.
To get a realistic result from a Hydrograph method it is necessary to add a
shape, or profile, to the storm which is characteristic of the geographical
location. These shapes are usually expressed as a Cumulative Rainfall Profile
(CRP). If you combine an average intensity read from IDF data with a CRP,
the result is a storm profile (hyetograph) which shows the variation of rainfall
throughout the whole storm.
Generating a rainfall profile
If you have good IDF and CRP data then you can fully utilise the
sophisticated hydrograph methods contained in Micro Drainage. In the UK,
for example, all this data exists and is built into the software. But while CRP
data is not always available elsewhere, it is still possible to obtain a profile
from IDF data for engineering purposes.
The two most important variables for engineering drainage networks are
intensity and volume.
For Source Control, the most important data is contained in the IDF library,
which is usually widely available. The volume of a storm does not vary with
the CRP profile. The engineer knows the average intensity from the IDF data
and he therefore knows the volume of the storm.
The Simulation program needs good volume data and good peak precipitation
data. Pipe flow, and hence local flooding, is greatly affected by peak
discharge, so it is necessary to know both the volume of a storm (average
intensity) and the peak intensity.
Peak practice
A clue to the peak intensity of a long storm can be found in the average
intensity of a short duration storm of the same frequency and location. So if a
100 minute storm in Seattle has an average intensity of 7.5 mm/hr, and a 10
minute storm in the same location has an average intensity of 30 mm/hr, it
would not be unreasonable to construct a rainfall profile that lasts for 100
minutes, has a peak intensity of 30 mm/hr and an average intensity of 7.5
mm/hr.
Page ii.6
Appendix ii
This profile combines the peak intensity of a short duration storm and the
volume of the longer storm. It will therefore provide a satisfactory engineered
profile for design.
Note: CRP data is available in the USA for SCS methods, so the engineer
has a choice.
Brewing up a storm
Micro Drainage can generate several typical storms from IDF data. In
practice, however, a 2 hour storm that has a peak similar to a 5 minute
duration storm, and a 24 hour storm that peaks similar to the average 30
minute intensity are sufficient to cover a whole spectrum of characteristics.
These two storms provide both ends of the spectrum - a long storm which
delivers a large volume and a shorter storm that has a significant peak
rainfall. A design that satisfies both these criteria in the Source Control or
Simulation programs will be a satisfactory design.
The profiles produced by Micro Drainage from IDF data use several storms
to produce the hyetograph. The 2 hour storm uses the intensities of the 120,
60, 30, 15 and 5 minute durations to construct a profile, so that the average
intensity measured each side of the centre of the storm equates to the average
intensities for these durations. This single 2 hour storm combines the effects
of storms of 5 different durations. The 24 hour storm combines the intensities
of the 24, 12, 6, 2, 1 and half-hour durations.
In rare cases a storm longer than one day will be critical for the calculation of
storage volume. In particular, when the allowable discharge from the network
is very low, a storm of low average intensity may still cause the system to fill
to the point of flooding.
Such storms are usually only critical when a storage structure has been
designed to restrict the flow to very low levels. Running these longer storms
at their average intensity throughout will demonstrate whether or not the
system can accommodate the accumulated volume.
Micro Drainage incorporates the facility to create your own IDF and Rainfall
Files. You can therefore model storms on the basis of any global rainfall
Appendix ii
Page ii.7
pattern. Profiles can be built either by applying an appropriate cumulative

profile to a your own custom-made IDF File, generating a file from IDF data
alone - using the Micro Drainage Rainfall Generator - or by keying data
directly into a Rainfall Profile spreadsheet to create a hyetograph.
CRP and Hyetograph
You also have the facility to enter cumulative rainfall profile (CRP) data,
which can be combined with IDF data to create a Hyetograph.
IDF data only
To generate a file from IDF data, select the Rainfall Profile option from the
Simulation Criteria form in Simulation or from Global Variables Inflow
options in Source Control.
Click the Edit button to open the Rainfall Profile form.
Now select the Generate Profile data button to open the Generate Rainfall
form.
Page ii.8
Appendix ii
Generate Profile data

The unique Generate Rainfall form appears:
Ensure the IDF/CRP Data tab is selected, click the Edit button next to the
IDF File graph and open the Trump25.idfx file. Select a duration of 120
minutes for the storm, then hit Generate.
The Rainfall Generator creates a curve for the storm:
Save the file as Trump25a.redx by clicking the Export button.

Now select 1440 minutes as the storm duration and hit Generate again. Save
this new curve as Trump25b.redx.
Appendix ii
Page ii.9
You now have hyetographs for a 2 hour and a 24 hour storm which can be
used for analysis.
Combining IDF and CRP data
If you have CRP data as well as IDF data, you can use the rainfall generator
to combine them in a curve. Re-open the Generate Rainfall form and open
Trump25.idfx as before.
Before you hit Generate, however, click on the Edit button next to the CRP
File graph box. Select UK50.crpx and the file and its key data appear within
the generator. Select a 2 hour storm. Now select Generate and the curve is
created.
Notice that the figure for the average intensity has been re-calculated to take
account of the IDF data.
In addition, if you have rainfall profile data, you can create a hyetograph
immediately, using the Rainfall Profile form. Use the same procedure as you
used for the IDF spreadsheet both to open, save and to enter data into the
CRP and rainfall profile spreadsheets.
Page ii.10
Appendix ii
Appendix iii
Page iii.1

Appendix iii
Rural Discharge
Page iii.2
Appendix iii
Hydrology
Techniques for the derivation of Peak Flows from undeveloped and
partly urbanised catchments, also used for the determination of
allowable discharge from new developments.
The methods for determining runoff from ungauged catchments have been
improved since the first publication of the Flood Studies Report. However
they are strewn over many years and several references. The following is a
potted history and the background to the methods used by the software.
The Flood Studies Report, Volume 1, Chapters 4 and 6 detail approaches for
determining runoff from ungauged catchments. These have been modified in
subsequent Flood Studies Supplementary Reports Nos 5, 14 and 16. Ciria
Book 14, 1993, takes these modifications into account and provides clear
worked examples of the methodologies. These may also be used on partly
urbanised catchments.
On small catchments, less than 25km2, the IH 124 equation for QBAR (and
the equation for the instantaneous time to peak for the unit hydrograph
approach) may be used in lieu of those suggested in Ciria Book 14 but
otherwise the detailed approach is unchanged.
Comparisons between the FSR and FEH methods are contained in FEH
Volumes 3 and 4, 1999. The difficulty in obtaining digitally derived data for
small catchments and the relative complexity of developing growth curves
using FEH methodology are reasons for the continuing use of the FSR
approach in appropriate circumstances on small catchments.
We have also included the ADAS method as it is widely used but it was
developed for the design of field drains and uses far less sites than the IH 124
report which included 6 ADAS sites in its 87 small catchments.
In summary therefore the calculation to determine discharge from ungauged
catchments may be done using ADAS 345 reference or IH 124 (Institute of
Hydrology Report No. 124 Flood estimation for small catchments). A third
method is also available based on Flood Estimation Handbook data but it is
usually used on catchments larger than 20km2.
Appendix iii
Page iii.3
The IH method is based on the Flood Studies Report approach and developed
for use on catchments less than 25 km2. It yields the Mean Annual Maximum
Flood (QBAR). This reference also recommends the use of Ciria Book 14 to
generate Growth Factors. These are used to convert QBAR to different return
periods for different regions in the UK. This method has therefore been
adopted in the software and full tables of return period floods for the regions
of the UK are presented. Information for Ireland is also given in this
appendix.
The ADAS document does not refer to any return period but yields a 'Peak
Flood Flow'. However ADAS has confirmed that for 'Grass' as the dominant
crop type the return period of the flow is 1 year. For other crop types
different return periods have been used but if we assume 'greenfield runoff'
means grassland then ADAS yields a 1 year return period (or 100% annual
probability).
A 1 year peak runoff may be converted to a Mean Annual Flood using Table
1 of FSSR No 2, 1977. The Mean Annual Flood may then be converted to
other return periods using the method described for IH 124 above. The table
of return period flows is only available for 'grass' as the dominant crop type.
The Flood Estimation Handbook method yields the Median Annual
Maximum Flood (QMED). The software does not cover the FEH method of
developing growth curves and engineers must refer to Vol 3 of the FEH
handbook to generate flood flows for different return periods. The FEH
approach is intended for larger sites and the method cannot be applied to
catchments smaller than 50ha (0.5km2).
The statutory authority will advise on the approved method. Specifications
have been changed in the recent past and they may alter again. At the time of
writing the Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage Systems, July
2004, recommended the use of a modified IH 124 for catchments less than
200 hectares and it has dropped the use of ADAS. The Highways Authority
(HA 106) however recommends the use of ADAS up to 40 hectares and
thereafter IH 124. Source Control therefore supports ADAS, IH 124 and the
modified IH 124 under the ICP SUDS tab. Examples of the use of each
follow in this appendix.
Page iii.4
Appendix iii
These methods are statistically based and yield the peak value of the flood. If
the full flow hydrograph is required this must be generated using the rainfall
runoff unit hydrographs discussed in Appendix iv. However the IH and FEH
statistical methods of predicting peak flows may be used to adjust the
parameters of the Unit Hydrographs and more information is available on this
in FEH Volume 3 chapter 10.2.
The user must be suitably qualified in accordance with the requirements of
the FEH manuals and CD and should be familiar with the above references
and the notes supplied in the On Line Help.
The ADAS method
Reference Book 345 The design of field drainage pipe systems.

(Recommended for sites up to 40 ha HA 106/04).
We recommend that you purchase ADAS 345 and follow the example in
Appendix 5. A similar example is discussed here.
Before you run the software prepare the following data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Determine the catchment area in hectares.

Determine the maximum length of catchment in metres.
Determine the average slope of catchment Height/Length.
Determine the risk category (return period) for the catchment. (In ADAS
345 this is determined by the dominant crop type. ADAS has confirmed that
selecting Grass from the chart you are actually selecting the return period
of 2 years).
5. Determine the average rainfall in mm from Appendix 1 of the above
reference or the Flood Studies Report.
Determine the soil type factor ST from the table in Appendix 5:

Permeability class
Very slow
Slow to Mod
Moderate
Very Rapid
ST
1
0.8
0.5
0.1
(There are more details available from the above reference).
Appendix iii
Source Control
Page iii.5
Open Source Control and at the Open Screen double click the Rural Runoff
(QBAR/ADAS) icon to access the rural runoff statistical methods. It may
also be accessed at all other times through the File menu.
Click on the ADAS 345 tab and enter the data as shown.
Page iii.6
Appendix iii
Click the Calculator button and the results of the Mean Annual Flood (Q0)
are shown along with the Return Period Flood section which displays a
matrix of peak flows for various return periods and regions. The Total peak
flow and Return Period Flood table includes the percentage paved if it has
been specified.
This is sufficient data to obtain the ADAS Peak Flood Flow. It is often
necessary to obtain the runoff for a variety of return periods. For the purposes
of applying the growth curves for the different return periods the grass runoff
is assumed to be a 1 year return period and converted to the Mean Annual
Flood using FSSR 2. QBAR may be combined with the FSR growth curves
for the 10 regions of the UK. (Four growth curves for Ireland are also
supported after Cawley and Cunnane. The growth curve for the 1 year RP
has been assumed to be 0.85 for Ireland. Any area that has not been covered
may be input via the Growth Curve editor). M J Hall, D L Hockin and J B
Ellis (Ciria Book 14) devised a method for combining these growth factors
with a degree of urbanisation for UK catchments. It is the method
recommended for use with IH 124 and this method has been implemented in
the software.
The specified return period is in the third column and the line of results
highlighted is for the required Region.
The percentage paved is taken as the percentage Urbanisation for the
purposes of applying the growth curves. However this is not strictly correct
as the urbanisation figure is usually larger than the paved area. However
ADAS only allows a small percentage paved and any error would be small.
ADAS suggests that the unpaved result (paved area = 0) is simply increased
by the percentage paved but warns that if the paved area exceeds 10% of the
catchment then the method is not appropriate. If the amount of urbanisation
were significant then the IH 124 method, which specifically recommends the
Ciria Book 14 method for partly urbanised catchments, would be better
suited.
If the allowable discharge is to be based on the Greenfield runoff from the
undeveloped site then the percentage paved should be set to zero, the
dominant crop type to Grass (i.e. return period set to 2 years) and the ADAS
method is applicable to sites less than 30 ha.
Appendix iii
Page iii.7
ICP for SUDS

Recommended for sites <200ha
Similar to IH 124 but for areas <50ha the results are linearly interpolated
from the 50ha discharge. Outputs 1, 30 and 100 year RP discharges as
standard in compliance with ICP for SUDS. A 200 year RP may be specified
for Scotland.
QBAR estimation for small rural catchments.
Click on the ICP SUDS tab.
Enter the required Return Period
RP = 200 years
The area of the catchment is measured in hectares.

Area = 30ha
2
Note: Hectares have been chosen instead of km , as this is consistent with

the rest of the program suite and urban drainage design.
Obtain the average annual rainfall; SAAR from the FSR maps.
SAAR = 800mm
Enter the soil type based on the 5 soil categories.
The Soil values are 0.15, 0.3, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5 for soil types 1 to 5 respectively.
(Soil type from the Wallingford procedure maps).
Soil = 0.4
QBAR estimation for urban catchments
IH 124 recommends the use of the Ciria guide to the design of flood storage
reservoirs (Ciria Book 14, Hall et al, 1993). This also provides for the
estimate of flows for different return periods based on the FSR regional
growth curves.
Page iii.8
Appendix iii
Enter the data as below and click the Calculator button.
The region and the fraction of urbanisation are required variables for this
method. The fraction of urbanisation, URBAN, measured under the FSR
method is the area coloured orange on a 1:50000 Ordinance Survey map.
This differs from the measurement of the digitally derived variable URBEXT
available from the FEH CD. URBAN can also be estimated as
2.05*URBEXT (FEH Vol 4, Appendix B).
URBAN = 0
Note: For greenfield runoff estimation URBAN should be set to zero.
The UK is divided into 10 regions for growth factors. Click on the drop down
menu and select Region 9.
Region (Wales) = 9
The QBAR rural is shown which assumes no development and the QBAR
urban figure would show the increased runoff due to urbanisation.
Return Period Flood shows the selected return period alongside the 1, 30 and
100 year return period. The results for the selected region are highlighted.
Appendix iii
Page iii.9
IH 124 method
Recommended for sites <25km2
(HA 106/04 recommends use on sites >40ha)
QBAR estimation for small rural catchments.
Click on the IH 124 tab.
Enter the required Return Period
RP = 75 years
Area = 55ha
Note: Hectares have been chosen instead of km2, as this is consistent with
Note: If an area less than 50ha is entered the software will provide a
warning that the linearly interpolating is not used and the ICP SUDS tab
may be more suitable.
SAAR = 800mm
Enter the soil type based on the 5 soil categories.
The Soil values are 0.15, 0.3, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5 for soil types 1 to 5 respectively.
(Soil type from the Wallingford procedure maps).
Soil = 0.4
QBAR estimation for urban catchments
IH 124 recommends the use of the Ciria guide to the design of flood storage
reservoirs (Ciria Book 14, Hall et al, 1993). This also provides for the
estimate of flows for different return periods based on the FSR regional
growth curves. Four growth curves for Ireland are also supported after
Cawley and Cunnane. The growth curve for the 1 year RP has been assumed
to be 0.85 for Ireland. Any area that has not been covered may be input via
the Growth Curve editor.
Page iii.10
Appendix iii
The region and the fraction of urbanisation are required variables for this
method.The fraction of urbanisation, URBAN, measured under the FSR
method is the area coloured orange on a 1:50000 Ordinance Survey map.
This differs from the measurement of the digitally derived variable URBEXT
available from the FEH CD. URBAN can also be estimated as
2.05*URBEXT (FEH Vol 4, Appendix B).
URBAN = 0.10
The UK is divided into 10 regions for growth factors. Click on the dropdown
menu and select Region 9.
Click the Calculator button.
Region (Wales) = 9
The QBAR rural is shown which assumes no development and the higher
QBAR urban figure shows the increased runoff due to 0.10 urbanisation.
The Return Period Flood spreadsheet displays the variation in runoff from
each region for a range of return periods. The selected return period is shown
alongside return periods from 2 to 1000 years. The results for the selected
region are highlighted.
Appendix iii
Page iii.11
QMED estimation using the FEH method

Recommended for larger sites Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable
Drainage Systems, July 2004
Select the FEH tab. Click on the button next to Site Location and import the
EXAMPLEQMED.csv file from the \Micro Drainage 2014\Data directory.
Enter the area in hectares as shown (4000 ha) this may differ from the area
imported from the FEH CD if the boundaries of the site are different from
those selected on the CD. However you should attempt to select an area on
the FEH CD that closely corresponds to your site or the soil variables and
other details may not be representative.
Click the Calculator button and urban and rural values of QMED are
displayed.
The 'Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage Systems', July 2004
recommends that the use of the FEH method should be considered for
catchments larger than 2 km2. The program calculates the estimation of
QMED (median annual storm return period 2 years). However the
derivation of growth curves requires pooled catchments based on
hydrological similarity and the user is referred to the FEH manual volume 3
Page iii.12
Appendix iii
for more information on this approach which is not covered here.

The variables for QMED estimation are obtained from the FEH CD. A How
do I example is supplied with the software (and is available from the Help
menu) for those who are not familiar with the operation of the FEH CD.
Follow this example to produce a .CSV file for your site.
Greenfield Runoff Volume
Click on the Greenfield Volume tab.
Check the required Return Period and Storm Duration

RP = 100 years
SD = 360 mins
The M5-60 and ratio R can either be entered using the map or manually.
M5-60 = 20.00
Ratio R = 0.4
Check that the Areal Reduction Factor is set to 1.00.
Area = 55ha
SAAR = 800mm
For design purposes the Catchment Wetness Index (CWI) is a function of
SAAR and is automatically calculated.
CWI = 117.339
the SPR factors applied to each soil type differ from the SOIL factors used in
the Wallingford PR equation. Instead of factors ranging from 0.15 to 0.5 the
following are used:
Soil
Type 1, SPR = 10
Type 2, SPR = 30
Type 3, SPR = 37
Type 4, SPR = 47
Type 5, SPR = 53
Appendix iii
Page iii.13
If the site covers more than one soil type then the SPR is weighted based on
the fractions of each area covered by the soil types. In this example we assume
that 30% of the site has soil type 3 and the remainder has soil type 2.
SPR = 0.3*37 + 0.7*30 = 32.1
Click the Calculator button and the total Greenfield Runoff Volume (m) and
Percentage Runoff (PR%) are given.
Page iii.14
Appendix iii
Appendix iv
Page iv.1

Appendix iv
Unit Hydrograph
Page iv.2
Appendix iv
Why Use Unit Hydrographs?
Urban Drainage simulation programs are sometimes referred to as time-area

methods. These methods are based on rainfall falling on mostly paved
catchments and the runoff generated routed through the pipe network. The
urban runoff equations used are based on the Wallingford Procedure (or other
values may be substituted). These methods have usually concentrated on the
portion of runoff that is flash or fast runoff. This runoff is important on
developed sites as it contributes most to the peak flows. The Wallingford
Procedure was not intended for use on sites less than 20% paved.
The runoff from undeveloped or rural sites is slower. The method
traditionally used to develop runoff hydrographs from these sites has been the
unit hydrograph method. It too requires rainfall and a runoff relationship to
generate flows and for that reason is called a rainfall-runoff method. There
are similarities with the urban time-area methods and it is possible to set the
variables of the Wallingford Procedure to give similar results but it relies
heavily on the experience of the engineer. However, as the unit hydrograph
method is available, and comprehensive research has been conducted into its
use on rural sites, XP Solutions has implemented the method to allow
engineers to use a more appropriate approach to undeveloped catchments (or
parts of a catchment that are largely undeveloped).
Whether it be an urban or a rural catchment the response time of the site is
very important. The faster the runoff reaches a point the higher the peak flow.
In urban drainage these response times are expressed as a Time of
Concentration or Time-Area. In the Unit Hydrograph terminology variables
such as Time to Peak and Lag Time are used to define a catchments response
time. More importantly the Unit Hydrograph method has calibrated equations
to determine the response time on undeveloped catchments. These may be
predicted from catchment characteristics or if measured data exists the
methods of determining Lag are detailed in the FEH manual.
The other variable that is important in all drainage calculations is the
percentage runoff. In urban drainage methods the percentage runoff model
centres on the percentage paved area as this is critical. However, the rural
models pay more attention to soil characteristics and the FSR, FEH and
ReFH unit hydrograph methods have more appropriate equations for largely
unpaved catchments. Urban drainage engineers may be surprised by the
Appendix iv
Page iv.3
degree of runoff predicted by the FSR, FEH and ReFH Unit Hydrograph
models but they must remember that the runoff is usually over a much longer
time period i.e. rural sites have a much longer response time.
When to use the UH method
Simulation APT and Source Control APT allow the engineer to combine
flows from urban and rural catchments. As both methods are rainfall-runoff
methods the same rainfall event may be used to generate flows from both the
rural and urban elements of the catchments (one complication is that return
periods may differ for FEH and FSR methods see help for details).
The Unit Hydrograph method may also be used on partly urbanised
catchments and here there may be an overlap with the urban simulation
approach. However, in these cases it is a matter of judgement which method
is best and no hard and fast rule exists.
The FEH advises that if the variable URBEXT exceeds 0.5 (Volume 4,
chapter 9.3.) then the Unit Hydrograph method should not be used. This is
not much help as it implies that the site is very developed and the usual urban
drainage approach should be taken. If the site is largely sewered and contains
infiltration and storage structures then the normal urban simulation approach
is likely to be more accurate. However, Micro Drainage is uniquely powerful
in that it allows the engineer to divide the site into sub-catchments of
developed and undeveloped areas and to use the Time-Area and Unit
Hydrograph methods as appropriate.
How to Define the Different Areas
The Wallingford Procedure runoff and time-area approach is used on all

urban areas. These are the areas that you have input in the System 1 program,
any time-area input in Source Control and Simulation, or any areas you have
defined in Simulation APT network details.
The Unit Hydrograph method is applied only to the areas defined in the
Generate Unit Hydrograph sections of Source Control APT and Simulation
APT programs. These areas are entirely separate from the Urban Areas
described above and they must not be duplicated in the inputs described
above for urban areas.
Page iv.4
Appendix iv
How do UH relate to Peak Flow prediction?
Methods for predicting peak flood flows using statistical methods are
described in Appendix iii. These differ in a number of respects from the Unit
Hydrograph method. Firstly they are not rainfall-runoff methods as they are
not directly related to rainfall events. They are derived from the statistical
analysis of flows from catchments. Of course the flows have been generated
from rainfall events but the analysis is based on the resultant flows. Secondly
they generate peak flows only, which cannot be used for simulations or
volume calculations. However, these peaks should relate to the peak flow
generated by the unit hydrograph and because of this they may be used to
calibrate the unit hydrograph.
Adjusting the parameters of the rainfall-runoff model using the statistical
methods provided in Source Control APT is discussed in FEH Volume 3,
Chapter 10.
Which method - FSR, FEH or ReFH Unit Hydrographs?

The Revitalised Flood Hydrograph model (ReFH), July 2005, is the latest
method published in the UK and therefore this method should be the
preferred approach if the digital input variables can be obtained.
The triangular instantaneous unit hydrograph of the FSR and FEH methods
has been replaced by a kinked triangle. The equation for Tp has been
modified and a variable Base Flow introduced. The runoff equation has also
been changed and is based on a loss model derived from the Probability
Distributed Model (PDM) developed by Moore.
There is not a one to one correlation between rainfall return periods and
runoff return periods in the FEH and FSR methods. In rural areas
(URBEXT<0.125), for example, a 140 year rainfall RP is needed to produce
a 100 year runoff. This poses a difficulty when combining the Wallingford
procedure with these unit hydrograph methods. This is resolved in ReFH as
both the Wallingford Procedure and ReFH produce the same return period
runoff as the rainfall event used to generate the flows.
The ReFH method modifies the FEH DDF design rainfall by a seasonal
correction factor for summer and winter. Also the initial soil moisture storage
is seasonally corrected for design storms and varies with return period.
Appendix iv
Page iv.5
A detailed description of the ReFH model is contained in Revitalisation of

the FSR/FEH rainfall runoff method, R&D Technical Report FD1913/TR.
The Flood Estimation Handbook Volume 4 may be referred to for a
comprehensive discussion of the differences between FSR and FEH.
The FEH method is closely based on the FSR method. The biggest difference
is that the FEH rainfall model can produce significantly different results to
the FSR rainfall generation. However, as is discussed later, the FSR method
may be used in the software with any rainfall including rainfall files
generated using the FEH rainfall model.
The FSR approach implemented in the software is that modified by the IoH
124 document for small catchments (less than 25km2). It has the advantage
that most of the variables are readily understandable and available. If you are
new to the unit hydrograph approach it may help your understanding to work
through the FSR method and identify the comparable variables in the FEH
and ReFH methods.
The ReFH and FEH approaches rely on the digitally derived data available on
the FEH CD. It can be difficult to obtain data for a small catchment from the
CD and it is important to check the data with a local site survey. If the
boundary of a river catchment were a few metres out it would make little
difference to a 300km2 catchment but it could be very significant for a 50ha
catchment adjacent to that boundary.
The ReFH method is the latest approach and as such may be used if the site
can be identified on the FEH CD. However, small catchments can present
particular difficulties and the choice of variables may be more important than
the choice of methods. Local information on existing watercourses and
culvert capacity and the frequency of exceedance should be sought to verify
the model. Any measured data available on the site or adjacent sites should
be sought. Further information on the performance of the rainfall-runoff
method is available in FEH, Volume 4, Chapter 7 and R&D Technical Report
FD1913/TR.
As the ReFH and the FEH methods use the same digital source for their data
only the more recent ReFH method is illustrated in this example.
Page iv.6
Appendix iv
FSR Unit Hydrograph method

(Rainfall runoff method)
Users should be familiar with the Flood Studies Report and we also
recommend Ciria Book 14 as it details the procedure and the method of
calculation clearly. The only deviation from Ciria 14 is that the equation for
Tp(0) has been taken from IH 124 and not FSSR 16 as the latter is not as
consistent for catchments < 25 km2. There are also notes in the On Line Help
that should be thoroughly reviewed.
The following example is used for illustration:
Area = 30ha
Note: Hectares have been chosen instead of km2, as this is consistent with
Measure the length of the main channel as described in Book 14. On a small
site (less than 2500ha) any reasonable approach can be used.
MSL = 600m
Note: Again metres have been used in lieu of km to be consistent.
Measure the main channel slope. This is the average slope of the main channel
between points 10% and 85% of the channel length measured from the
channel outlet. In other words ignore the top 15% and the bottom 10% of the
channel. The program requires you to enter the two heights and it calculates
the slope.
H(85%) = 205m
H(10%) = 203m
Obtain the average annual rainfall.
SAAR = 800mm
Appendix iv
Page iv.7
The fraction of urbanisation, URBAN, measured under the FSR method is the
area coloured orange on a 1:50000 Ordnance Survey map. This differs from
the measurement of the digitally derived URBEXT available on the FEH CD.
URBAN can also be estimated as 2.05*URBEXT (FEH Vol 4, Appendix B).
URBAN = 0.15
The percentage runoff is derived by reference to the 5 soil types used in the
Wallingford Procedure PR equation for urban runoff. However, the SPR
factors applied to each soil type differ from the SOIL factors used in the
Wallingford PR equation. Instead of factors ranging from 0.15 to 0.5 the
following are used:
Soil
Type 1, SPR = 10
Type 2, SPR = 30
Type 3, SPR = 37
Type 4, SPR = 47
Type 5, SPR = 53
If the site covers more than one soil type then the SPR is weighted based on
the fractions of each area covered by the soil types. In this example we assume
that 30% of the site has soil type 3 and the remainder has soil type 2.
SPR = 0.3*37 + 0.7*30 = 32.1
This data may be used with either Source Control or Simulation if APT has
also been purchased. The Source Control module allows a unit hydrograph to
be generated if, under Global Variables an Input Hydrograph has been chosen
in the Additional Inflow pull down option. As the rest of the procedure is
identical to Simulation, only a simulation example is presented here.
Run Simulation A.P.T. using your preferred method and at the Open Screen
double click Open Existing File. From the data supplied with the software
choose Appendix4FSR.mdx. We will assume that this site has a largely
undeveloped catchment (say 15% urbanised) draining into pipe 3.000.
Page iv.8
Appendix iv
At the Simulation Criteria set the Return Period to 30 years and the Storm
Duration to 120 minutes.
Under the Network menu select Input/Unit Hydrographs.
For Hydrograph 1 enter the DS (downstream) Pipe Number as 3.000 and

select Unit for hydrograph method.
Then click the Generate button at the bottom of the form.

The Generate Unit Hydrograph form will appear. The Return Period and
Storm Duration are identical to those set in the Simulation Criteria and will
be used on both the Urban (the normal areas detailed in the Network Details)
and the Rural (Unit Hydrograph) elements of the catchment. If the rural area
is some distance from the development then there could be a different M5-60
and Ratio R for both areas.
Appendix iv
Page iv.9
Enter the above measured data as shown for the FSR Input tab.
For design purposes the Catchment Wetness Index (CWI) is a function of
SAAR and is automatically calculated. The time to peak Tp(0) is calculated
from these site characteristics using the recommended equation from IH 124
for general use. IH 124 also claims it to be more suitable for catchments <
25km2 than the FSSR 16 equation.
If the LAG time has been measured on the site it may be specified and this
will be used to calculate Tp(0) in preference to the catchment characteristics
refer to IH 124. In this example no site measurements are available and the
LAG time is not specified.
FEH, Volume 4, Chapter 7 discusses the performance of FSR methods. The
most important variables for all rainfall runoff methods are time to peak Tp
(related in urban drainage to Time of Concentration and rural drainage to Lag
Time) and percentage runoff. Small catchments may be difficult to define in
terms of catchment characteristics and where measured data on Tp is
available it will greatly improve the results. The Source Control APT
program also provides information on statistical peak flow and this
information should not be ignored when verifying the results of the FSR
method. Adjusting the parameters of the FSR method using the statistical
techniques (QBAR and QMED prediction see Appendix iii) is discussed in
FEH Volume 3, Chapter 10.2.
Page iv.10
Appendix iv
Click OK on the Input / Unit Hydrographs and analyse the network At Fine
time step. Select No to the warnings to accept the specified run times.
Open the Hydrograph Tables from the Results menu. Select pipe 3.000 from
the dropdown. Select the View Unit Hydrograph button and the Unit
Hydrograph Results are displayed
View Unit Hydrograph
The profile graph displays a 120 minute storm, based on the rainfall details
specified.
Normally if a hydrograph is specified a different hydrograph will have to be
input to correspond to each storm event. However, the use of the unit
hydrograph method to define the flow overcomes this problem. If the rainfall
storm duration or return period in the Simulation Criteria change then a new
unit hydrograph will be generated.
This means that a Seasonal Return Period Wizard may be run and the Unit
Hydrographs will be automatically generated to correspond to the different
rainfall events. This ensures that the 'developed' runoff generated from the
areas defined in System 1 (or the Network Details) will be combined with
'rural' runoff generated from the Unit Hydrographs for the same return
periods and storm durations. Similarly if rainfall files are used to generate
runoff from the paved areas then the same rainfall data will be used in the
Appendix iv
Page iv.11
Unit Hydrograph. Further details of return periods to be used with Unit

Hydrograph methods are contained in the Help.
For more details on the convolution of the net rainfall and the unit
hydrograph refer to Ciria Book 14 for the method of calculation.
The convolution of the net rainfall and the unit hydrograph is presented for
verification purposes under the Unit Hydrograph tab
View the graphs for pipe 3.000.
Page iv.12
Appendix iv
The only flow entering this pipe has been generated from the unit
hydrograph. It can be seen that the maximum flow shown occurs just before
240 minutes and a longer analysis may be required. If however Yes was
selected from the prompt, the analysis would have been run for 324mins
(Twice TP(0)). This is because the instantaneous time to peak Tp(0) is 162
minutes which is much longer than the time of concentration of the
developed catchment.
View the graphs for pipe 1.004.
Observe that peak flow generated by the developed catchment occurs at 64

minutes, which is 3 hours before the peak from the rural area.
You may generate a longer analysis by changing the Run Time (mins) in the
Simulation Criteria to 720 minute duration.
However, the 120 minute storm is not critical and the critical storm duration
is never less than Tp(0), the instantaneous time to peak of the unit
hydrograph. It is likely to be of the order of 2Tp(0) see equation 3.16, Ciria
Book 14. There is no need, however, to speculate on the critical duration as a
wizard is provided in the software to run all the storm durations. This wizard
will run each storm for twice its duration and the critical duration should
Appendix iv
Page iv.13
therefore contain the peak of the hydrograph.

The engineer should verify this before relying on the summary of results.
Run the Seasonal Return Period Wizard from the Wizards menu. Full details
of running Wizards are given in Example 8 on Advanced Productivity Tools.
Follow the instructions on screen and select all storm durations at Step 2. At
Step 3 clear the listed return periods and specify a 30 year return period and
proceed to run the wizard.
A message at the end of the wizard will confirm that you have specified a
unit hydrograph and therefore a new input hydrograph will be generated for
each storm in the wizard. Click No to the second message to accept runtimes.
Discussion of results
Select the Critical Storm on the Summary. The urban area discharges down
pipe 1.000 through to pipe 1.003. Therefore if you wish to view the urban
hydrograph on its own you must view the graph of pipe 1.003 or the
hydrograph tables for this pipe.
The unit hydrograph is the only input into pipe 3.000. Therefore if you wish
to view the rural hydrograph on its own then view the graph of pipe 3.000.
The critical storm for pipe 3.000 is also the critical storm for the rural area as
it is the only discharge into pipe 3.000. The Unit Hydrograph discharging
into pipe 3.000 has a critical storm of 360 minutes which is not unexpected.
Using the Storm Selector (if it is not visible it may be called from the Results
menu) choose the 360 minute summer storm. As with all storms generated
automatically by the wizard the program has output results for twice its
duration. The peak of the rural hydrograph is shown on the graphs for the 720
minute run of the 360 minute storm. The peak water levels and flows are
therefore correct for the 360 minute storm.
The shorter less critical storms may not contain their peaks within the
analysis duration. If the 30 minute storm is viewed then only 60 minutes of
results are shown. You can see that the hydrograph is still rising and has not
reached its peak after 60 minutes. However, as already stated the critical
storm duration is longer than the time to peak of the unit hydrograph and
Page iv.14
Appendix iv
when a storm longer than this is run the maximum flow will be contained on
the results.
Now select the graphs for pipe 1.004. This pipe is at the confluence of the
urban and the rural runoff. The rural element peaks for a 360 minute duration
storm but this does not provide a higher peak flow than that generated by the
urban element for short duration storms. As the response time of the rural
area (a function of the time to peak) is so long the urban and rural
hydrographs do not coincide. The rural flows increase the peak discharge in
pipe 1.004 by only a small amount during the 15 minute storm which
produces the largest flow for the combined site.
The volume of runoff (area under the flow graph) from the rural area
however, is large and if the discharge from pipe 1.004 were restricted the
effect of the rural runoff would be very significant on storage.
Note: The FSR method is defaulted to if FSR rainfall (M5-60, r) is
specified. However, in many locations in the UK the FEH rainfall is
significantly higher than the older FSR rainfall generation. It is possible to
use the above method with FEH rainfall by saving the FEH data as a series
of files, which may be accomplished by using Rainfall Profile in the Edit
menu of Module Selector available from the Window menu. This option
may be used on smaller catchments where it may be difficult to obtain
good digital information on catchment characteristics from the FEH CD.
However, if the digital data can be reasonably determined then the FEH
method may be used with FEH rainfall. The decision should be made by an
experienced engineer familiar with Volume 4 of FEH and no general
recommendation is possible.
Appendix iv
Page iv.15
ReFH Unit Hydrograph Method

(Rainfall runoff method)
Although the FEH method remains in the software the ReFH method is used
here as it shares several variables with the FEH method and is the latest
method. Users must be familiar with the Revitalisation of the FSR/FEH
rainfall runoff method, R&D Technical Report FD1913/TR. As the FSR
method requires more site measurements to be conducted by the engineer, the
above FSR example should be run first to gain a better insight into the
operation of the unit hydrograph method.
The method is similar to the FSR method but there are some important
differences. The rainfall derivation is the newer (1999) FEH model, with
updated data, and may result in significantly different results from the FSR
methodology. This is discussed in FEH Volume 1. The other variables used
are obtained from the FEH CD-ROM.
The percentage runoff equations have been altered from the manually derived
FSR method to account for differences in the digitally derived variables; it
has also been updated to allow the percentage runoff to vary throughout the
storm. ReFH also has an updated equation for Tp for use with digitally
derived catchment descriptors, similar to the FEH method.
The rainfall variables and the catchment characteristics for the site are
obtained from the FEH CD. A How do I example is supplied with the
software for those who are not familiar with the operation of the FEH CD.
Follow this example to produce a .CSV file for your site.
As with the FSR example this data may be used with either Source Control or
Simulation if APT has also been purchased. The Source Control module
allows a unit hydrograph to be generated if, under Global Variables, an Input
Hydrograph has been chosen in the Additional Inflow pull down option. As
the rest of the procedure is identical to Simulation, only a simulation example
is presented here.
Run Simulation A.P.T. using your preferred method and select Open Existing
File. From the data supplied with the software choose Appendix4ReFH.mdx.
We will assume that this site has a largely undeveloped catchment draining
into pipe 3.000.
Page iv.16
Appendix iv
At the Simulation Criteria check the Rainfall Model is set to FEH Rainfall
and the file Penwood.csv has been loaded into the Site Location, this contains
the rainfall data and catchment characteristics for the site.
Set the Return Period to 30 years and the Storm Duration to 120 minutes in
the Simulation Criteria. Accept all the other defaults and click OK.
Under the Network menu select Input / Unit Hydrographs.
For Hydrograph 1 enter the DS (downstream) Pipe Number as 3.000 and

select Unit for the Hydrograph Method. Then click the Generate button.
Select the ReFH Input tab in the Generate Unit Hydrograph form, and as in
the Simulation Criteria, double click on Site Location (or click on the
adjacent button). Call in the FEH csv file entitled Penwood.csv, which now
transfers both the rainfall data and catchment characteristics for the site.
The rainfall data may differ slightly from that called into the Simulation
Criteria because the 'Urban' data is always the 1 km data while the rural data
Appendix iv
Page iv.17
is the catchment average. The reason for this is that most urban development
sites are less than 100ha while rural catchments may be tens of thousands of
hectares and the average rainfall characteristics may differ significantly from
the 1 km variables.
Check the catchment characteristics. The Areal Reduction Factor will be read
from the Simulation Criteria, we will accept this value, however, you may
generate the value based on area and storm duration by clicking the
calculator. From site surveys the area is 49 hectares and this should be
entered instead of the 57 hectares shown. The variables that relate to site
slope and stream length have been confirmed by the site survey and are
unchanged. Development has taken place in this area and to allow for any
future development we are going to assume an URBEXT of 0.15 (equivalent
to the FSR URBAN value of 0.308, FEH Vol 4 App B).
As this is a small site any measurement of Lag time should be specified and
this will be used to calculate Tp in preference to the value estimated from the
catchment characteristics (see FEH Volume 4 Chapter 7).The Return Period
and Storm Duration are taken from the Simulation Criteria and will be used
on both the urban (the normal areas detailed in the Network Details) and the
rural (Unit Hydrograph) elements of the catchment.
The data should be as shown below for the ReFH Input.
Page iv.18
Appendix iv
If known data is available the Lag time may be used to vary the time to peak
TP. Try a Lag time of say 1 hour and see how this varies the flow. When you
are finished experimenting delete the Lag time and restore the variables to
those contained on the above before proceeding.
Click OK on the Input/Unit Hydrographs form. Analyse the network At Fine
time step.
Open the Hydrograph Tables from the Results menu. Select pipe 3.000 from
the dropdown. Select the View Unit Hydrograph button and the Unit
Hydrograph Results are displayed
View Unit Hydrograph
The results for a 30 yr RP, 120 minute storm are shown.
Alpha represents a correction factor applied to the initial soil moisture which
is used to calculate the percentage runoff. The value is seasonally dependent
and is only used for Design Rainfall events.
The convolution of the net rainfall and the unit hydrograph is presented for
verification purposes under the Unit Hydrograph tab. Refer to Revitalisation
of the FSR/FEH rainfall runoff method, R&D Technical Report FD1913/TR.
Appendix iv
Page iv.19
View the graphs for pipe 3.000. This will show the results for the unit
hydrograph analysis as it enters upstream of pipe 3.000.
Again the critical storm can be found by running the Seasonal Return Period
Wizard. Follow the procedure as described for FSR and the critical storm is
the 180 minute storm. This is approximately 2Tp, which is to be expected.
Discussion of results
Refer to the FSR method discussion of results for an explanation of which

flows are generated by the urban area and which result from the unit
hydrograph.
The rural area is very large relative to the urban catchment. In this case the
rural runoff is dominant in producing both the critical peak flow at the outfall
of the combined catchments and the critical volume. Contrast this with the
results for the smaller rural area used in the FSR example. It is not sufficient
to simply look at the summary of results. A thorough review of the
hydrographs in both tabular and graphical form is essential to obtain an
understanding of the dynamics of the runoff.
There are worked examples of the FEH unit hydrograph method in chapter 6
of FEH, should you wish to look at them. The above information is intended
as a help to getting started with the Unit Hydrograph method. The runoff
Page iv.20
Appendix iv
from undeveloped catchments is very variable and much more difficult to

predict than urban drainage. Engineering judgement must be exercised and
engineers who are not familiar with Revitalisation of the FSR/FEH rainfall
runoff method, R&D Technical Report FD1913/TR should not use this
method.
Appendix v
Page v.1

Appendix v
Allowable Discharge for Example 8
Page v.2
Appendix v
Allowable Discharges
This Appendix is referenced from and forms part of Example 8.

Knowledge of the Interim Code of Practice approach to allowable discharges
is required for the discussion that follows. The subject is dealt with in detail
in Appendix iii.
For Example 8 the allowable discharge rates are required. Open Source
Control and at the Open Screen double click the Rural Runoff
(QBAR/ADAS) icon. Then click on the ICP SUDS tab.
The input variables for the Example 8 site are shown below and a further
explanation of the method is available in Appendix iii. The SAAR and Soil
values can be loaded from the Map. Click the Map button and select a site
midway between Swindon and Oxford. Alternatively type in the values as
shown.
Click the Calculator button.
Appendix v
Page v.3
QBAR is given as 20.1 l/s.

The one year return period event is 17.1 l/s for Region 6.
If the volume of runoff increases after development then the maximum
allowable discharge is likely to be QBAR when a 100 year rainfall event falls
on the site. You must also confirm that the 1 year greenfield runoff is not
exceeded for the 1 year event on the developed site.
If this additional runoff can be infiltrated or put into long-term storage then
the maximum allowable discharge may be increased. Then the 1, 30 and 100
year greenfield discharges will be allowed for the 1, 30 and 100 year events
respectively on the developed site.
Example 8 has no infiltration or long term storage so it is assumed that 17.1
l/s should not be exceeded for the 1 year event and that 20.1 l/s should not be
exceeded for the 30 year and the 100 year events.
uksupport@xpsolutions.com
ukinfo@xpsolutions.com
www.xpsolutions.com
Tel: +44 (0) 1635 582555 Fax: +44 (0) 1635 582131
Nort
Belconnen AC

Micro Drainage Uk Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Micro Drainage Uk Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

INDUSTRY STANDARD DRAINAGE DESIGN SOFTWARE

Revision 0 January 2014

Micro Drainage 2014

Working with Micro Drainage

System 1 - The Modified Rational Method

System 1 - Open Channel Design

System 1 - Schedules, Longsections, Plan & 3D Graphics

System 1 - Foul Sewer Design with Schedules

Source Control - Storage Lake

Source Control - Tank Sewer

Simulation - Simulation of a drainage system with tank sewers

Simulation - Advanced Productivity Tools & CASDeF

Channel - The Backwater Step Method

Source Control - Infiltration Systems

QuOST - Quantities & Costings

DrawNet (CAD) - Working within AutoCAD

DrawNet - Graphical Model Build

FloodFlow - Overland Flow Path Analysis

Pluvius Use of Extended Time Series Rainfall

These examples are designed to give you hands-on experience of working

Installing Micro Drainage

If autoplay is switched off or is not available then proceed as follows:

From the Start menu select the Run option.

Click Next to proceed through the Installation wizard.

If you are upgrading an existing copy of Micro Drainage, follow the

Installing a Network copy

Follow the same procedure as for a standalone copy.

Micro Drainage requires a device driver (haspdinst) to allow communication

The DVD contains a host of other information relevant to installing and

The topic entitled Read Me contains late breaking information. It is

Working with Micro Drainage

Start a New Job

You will now see the Design Criteria screen:

Pipe and Manhole Sizes

Creating the network - Network Details

We will use this spreadsheet to design the following drainage network:

The known data for the network are as follows:

Note: Here, R denotes Return. Where no entry is shown, System 1 will

Completing the spreadsheet

mouse as described previously. However, Time of Entry cannot, of course, be

Pipes 2.000 and 3.000

Now enter the following two rows:

Now enter this row:

Enter the following row:

Enter the following row:

Enter the following row:

Checking your entry

Saving your work and opening new projects

Editing an existing line

The number of the pipe highlighted is automatically shown. However, you

Re-inserting the deleted pipe Revision Manager

The Revision Manager will be operating if Save Undo Information is

The Longsections function gives you a full graphic representation of the

Previous pipes displayed

main line; System 1 allows you to view up to thirty pipes at a time.

Managing windows in System 1

Switching between windows

We will now demonstrate the Optimise function, beginning by entering the

Entry of cover levels

You have, of course, already asked System 1 to re-calculate your pipe

Obstructions underground - how to avoid them

In the event that your optimised network encounters an obstruction

Note: As well as fixing pipes in space it is also possible to specify a

Choose Longsection again and note how System 1 has automatically